PM-2000M User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 262

Patient Monitor

PM-2000M

ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATIONS, INC.

Release 1.1
About this Manual
P/N: 01.54.456526-11
Release Date: October 2014

Statement
This manual will help you understand the operation and maintenance of the product better. It is
reminded that the product shall be used strictly complying with this manual. User’s operation
failing to comply with this manual may result in malfunction or accident for which the
manufacturer cannot be held liable.
The manufacturer owns the copyrights of this manual. Without prior written consent of the
manufacturer, any materials contained in this manual shall not be photocopied, reproduced or
translated into other languages.
Materials protected by the copyright law, including but not limited to confidential information
such as technical information and patent information are contained in this manual, the user shall
not disclose such information to any irrelevant third party.
The user shall understand that nothing in this manual grants him, expressly or implicitly, any
right or license to use any of the intellectual properties of the manufacturer.
The manufacturer holds the rights to modify, update, and ultimately explain this manual.

Responsibility of the Manufacturer


The manufacturer only considers itself responsible for any effect on safety, reliability and
performance of the equipment if:
Assembly operations, extensions, re-adjustments, modifications or repairs are carried out by
persons authorized by the manufacturer, and
The electrical installation of the relevant room complies with national standards, and
The instrument is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, the manufacturer may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams, and
other information to help qualified technician to maintain and repair some parts, which the
manufacturer may define as user serviceable.

I
Terms Used in this Manual
This guide is designed to give key concepts on safety precautions.
WARNING
A WARNING label advises against certain actions or situations that could result in personal
injury or death.
CAUTION
A CAUTION label advises against actions or situations that could damage equipment, produce
inaccurate data, or invalidate a procedure.
NOTE
A NOTE provides useful information regarding a function or a procedure.

II
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Intended Use and Safety Guidance ................................................................................ 1
1.1 Intended Use........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Safety Guidance ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Explanation of Symbols on the Monitor ................................................................................ 5
Chapter 2 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.1 Initial Inspection..................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Mounting the Monitor ............................................................................................................ 8
2.3 Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................................. 8
2.4 Checking the Monitor ............................................................................................................ 9
2.5 Checking the Recorder ........................................................................................................... 9
2.6 Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................................ 9
2.7 Handing Over the Monitor ................................................................................................... 10
Chapter 3 Basic Operation .............................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 11
3.1.1 Main Unit .................................................................................................................. 11
3.1.2 Parameter Amplifier Mainframe ............................................................................... 16
3.1.3 Measurement Modules .............................................................................................. 17
3.1.4 XM Module ............................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Operating and Navigating .................................................................................................... 21
3.2.1 Using Keys ................................................................................................................ 22
3.3 Setting Parameters................................................................................................................ 24
3.3.1 Accessing the Parameter Menu ................................................................................. 24
3.3.2 Activating / Deactivating a Parameter Measurement ................................................ 25
3.3.3 Resolving Module Conflicts ..................................................................................... 25
3.3.4 Resolving IBP Label Conflicts .................................................................................. 26
3.4 Operating Mode ................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.1 Demo Mode............................................................................................................... 26
3.4.2 Standby Mode ........................................................................................................... 27
3.4.3 Night Mode ............................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Changing Monitor Settings .................................................................................................. 27
3.5.1 Adjusting Screen Brightness ..................................................................................... 27
3.5.2 Changing Date and Time ........................................................................................... 27
3.6 Adjusting Volume ................................................................................................................. 28
3.6.1 Adjusting Key Volume .............................................................................................. 28
3.6.2 Adjusting Alarm Volume ........................................................................................... 28
3.6.3 Adjusting Beat Volume.............................................................................................. 28
3.7 Checking Your Monitor Version .......................................................................................... 28
3.8 Networked Monitoring ......................................................................................................... 28
3.9 Setting Languages ................................................................................................................ 29
3.10 Calibrating Screens ............................................................................................................ 29

III
3.11 Disabling the Touch Screen ................................................................................................ 29
3.12 Using the Bar Code Scanner .............................................................................................. 29
Chapter 4 Alarms ............................................................................................................................. 30
4.1 Alarm Category .................................................................................................................... 30
4.1.1 Physiological alarms ................................................................................................. 30
4.1.2 Technical Alarms ....................................................................................................... 30
4.1.3 Prompts ..................................................................................................................... 30
4.2 Alarm Levels ........................................................................................................................ 30
4.3 Controlling Alarm ................................................................................................................ 31
4.3.1 Setting Parameter Alarm ........................................................................................... 31
4.3.2 Temporary Alarm Mute ............................................................................................. 32
4.3.3 Alarm Mute ............................................................................................................... 33
4.4 Latching Alarms ................................................................................................................... 33
4.5 Disabling Sensor off Alarms ................................................................................................ 33
4.6 Testing Alarms...................................................................................................................... 33
Chapter 5 Alarm Information ......................................................................................................... 34
5.1 Physiological Alarm Information ......................................................................................... 34
5.2 Technical Alarm Information ............................................................................................... 40
5.3 Prompts ................................................................................................................................ 58
5.4 Adjustable Range of Alarm Limits ....................................................................................... 59
Chapter 6 Managing Patients ......................................................................................................... 64
6.1 Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................... 64
6.1.1 Patient Category and Paced Status ............................................................................ 65
6.2 Quick Admit ......................................................................................................................... 65
6.3 Editing Patient Information .................................................................................................. 65
6.4 Updating a Patient ................................................................................................................ 65
6.5 Central Monitoring System .................................................................................................. 66
Chapter 7 User Interface ................................................................................................................. 67
7.1 Setting Interface Style .......................................................................................................... 67
7.2 Selecting Display Parameters ............................................................................................... 67
7.3 Changing Waveform Position .............................................................................................. 67
7.4 Changing Interface Layout ................................................................................................... 67
7.5 Viewing Trend Screen .......................................................................................................... 68
7.6 Viewing Oxygen Screen ....................................................................................................... 68
7.7 Viewing Large Font Screen .................................................................................................. 68
7.8 Viewing the Vital Screen ...................................................................................................... 69
7.9 Viewing the Bed View Window ........................................................................................... 69
7.9.1 Opening the Bed View Window ................................................................................ 69
7.9.2 Settings of the Bed View Window ............................................................................ 69
7.10 Changing Parameter and Waveform Colors ....................................................................... 70
7.11 User Configuration ............................................................................................................. 70

IV
7.12 Default Configuration ........................................................................................................ 70
Chapter 8 Monitoring ECG ............................................................................................................ 71
8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 71
8.2 ECG Safety Information ...................................................................................................... 71
8.3 ECG Display ........................................................................................................................ 73
8.3.1 Changing the Size of the ECG Wave ........................................................................ 73
8.3.2 Changing the ECG Filter Settings ............................................................................. 73
8.4 Selecting Calculation Lead .................................................................................................. 74
8.5 Monitoring Procedure .......................................................................................................... 74
8.5.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................ 74
8.5.2 Connecting ECG Cables ........................................................................................... 75
8.5.3 Selecting Lead Type .................................................................................................. 75
8.5.4 Installing Electrodes .................................................................................................. 75
8.6 ECG Menu Setup ................................................................................................................. 80
8.6.1 Setting Alarm Source ................................................................................................ 80
8.6.2 Smart Lead Off .......................................................................................................... 80
8.6.3 ECG Display ............................................................................................................. 80
8.6.4 Setting Pace Status .................................................................................................... 81
8.6.5 ECG Calibration ........................................................................................................ 81
8.6.6 ECG Waveform Settings ........................................................................................... 81
8.6.7 12 Leads ECG ........................................................................................................... 81
8.7 ST Segment Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 82
8.7.1 Setting ST Analysis ................................................................................................... 82
8.7.2 ST Display ................................................................................................................. 83
8.7.3 About ST Measurement Points.................................................................................. 83
8.7.4 Adjusting ST and ISO Measurement Points.............................................................. 83
8.8 Arr. Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 84
8.8.1 Arrhythmia Analysis.................................................................................................. 84
8.8.2 ARR Analysis Menu.................................................................................................. 85
Chapter 9 Monitoring RESP ........................................................................................................... 86
9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 86
9.2 RESP Safety Information ..................................................................................................... 86
9.3 Electrode Placement for Monitoring RESP ......................................................................... 86
9.4 Cardiac Overlay ................................................................................................................... 87
9.5 Chest Expansion ................................................................................................................... 87
9.6 Abdominal Breathing ........................................................................................................... 87
9.7 Selecting RESP Lead ........................................................................................................... 87
9.8 Changing Hold Type ............................................................................................................ 88
9.9 Changing the Size and Speed of the Respiration Wave ....................................................... 88
9.10 Changing the Apnea Time .................................................................................................. 88
Chapter 10 Monitoring SpO2 .......................................................................................................... 89
10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 89
V
10.2 SpO2 Safety Information .................................................................................................... 89
10.3 Measuring SpO2 ................................................................................................................. 90
10.4 Assessing the Validity of a SpO2 Reading.......................................................................... 91
10.5 SpO2 Alarm Delay .............................................................................................................. 92
10.6 Signal Intensity (SI)* ......................................................................................................... 92
10.7 Setting Pitch Tone .............................................................................................................. 92
10.8 Setting Sensitivity .............................................................................................................. 93
10.9 SatSeconds Alarm Management* ...................................................................................... 93
10.9.1 Describing SatSeconds ............................................................................................ 93
10.9.2 SatSeconds “Safety Net” ......................................................................................... 94
10.9.3 Setting SatSeconds Duration ................................................................................... 94
Chapter 11 Monitoring PR .............................................................................................................. 95
11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 95
11.2 Setting PR Source............................................................................................................... 95
11.3 Setting PR Volume ............................................................................................................. 95
11.4 Selecting the Active Alarm Source..................................................................................... 95
Chapter 12 Monitoring NIBP ......................................................................................................... 96
12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 96
12.2 NIBP Safety Information ................................................................................................... 96
12.3 Measurement Limitations................................................................................................... 97
12.4 Measurement Methods ....................................................................................................... 98
12.5 Measurement Procedures ................................................................................................... 98
12.5.1 Operation Prompts .................................................................................................. 99
12.5.2 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level .................................. 100
12.6 NIBP Multi-Review Window ........................................................................................... 100
12.7 Resetting NIBP................................................................................................................. 100
12.8 Calibrating NIBP.............................................................................................................. 101
12.9 Leakage Test ..................................................................................................................... 101
12.10 Setting Inflation Mode ................................................................................................... 102
Chapter 13 Monitoring TEMP...................................................................................................... 103
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 103
13.2 TEMP Safety Information ................................................................................................ 103
13.3 TEMP Monitoring Setup .................................................................................................. 103
13.4 Calculating Temp Difference ........................................................................................... 104
Chapter 14 Monitoring IBP .......................................................................................................... 105
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 105
14.2 IBP Safety Information .................................................................................................... 105
14.3 Monitoring Procedures ..................................................................................................... 106
14.3.1 Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring ...................................................................... 106
14.3.2 Zeroing the Pressure Transducer ........................................................................... 107
14.3.3 Zeroing a Pressure Measurement .......................................................................... 107

VI
14.3.4 Troubleshooting the Pressure Zeroing (Taking Art for Example) ......................... 107
14.3.5 IBP Pressure Calibration ....................................................................................... 107
14.4 Changing the IBP Waveform Ruler .................................................................................. 108
Chapter 15 Monitoring CO2 .......................................................................................................... 109
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 109
15.2 CO2 Safety Information.................................................................................................... 110
15.3 Monitoring Procedures ..................................................................................................... 110
15.3.1 Zeroing the sensor ................................................................................................. 110
15.3.2 Sidestream CO2 Module ........................................................................................ 111
15.3.3 Mainstream CO2 Module ...................................................................................... 112
15.4 Setting CO2 Corrections ................................................................................................... 114
15.5 Changing Apnea Alarm .................................................................................................... 114
15.6 Setting CO2 Waveform ..................................................................................................... 115
Chapter 16 Monitoring C.O. ......................................................................................................... 116
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 116
16.2 C.O. Safety Information ................................................................................................... 116
16.3 C.O. Monitoring Procedures ............................................................................................ 116
16.4 C.O. Measurement Window ............................................................................................. 118
16.5 Measurement Process ....................................................................................................... 119
16.6 Editing C.O. ..................................................................................................................... 120
16.7 Blood Temperature Monitoring ........................................................................................ 120
16.8 Setting the Computation Constant ................................................................................... 121
16.9 Recording C.O. Measurements ........................................................................................ 121
16.10 Setting INJ. TEMP Source ............................................................................................. 121
16.11 Setting the Interval ......................................................................................................... 121
Chapter 17 Monitoring AG ........................................................................................................... 122
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 122
17.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................................... 122
17.2.1 Safety Information for ISA Analyzer .................................................................... 122
17.2.2 Safety Information for IRMA Module .................................................................. 124
17.3 Monitoring Steps .............................................................................................................. 126
17.3.1 Monitoring Steps for ISA Analyzer....................................................................... 126
17.3.2 Monitoring Steps for IRMA Module..................................................................... 128
17.4 Setting Apnea Alarm Time ............................................................................................... 131
17.5 Working Status of ISA analyzer ....................................................................................... 132
17.6 Working Status of IRMA Module .................................................................................... 132
17.7 O2 Compensations ............................................................................................................ 132
17.8 Effects of Humidity .......................................................................................................... 132
Chapter 18 Monitoring BIS*......................................................................................................... 134
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 134
18.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................................... 137

VII
18.3 BIS Monitoring Setup ...................................................................................................... 139
18.4 BIS Continuous Impedance Check .................................................................................. 140
18.5 BIS Sensor Check ............................................................................................................ 140
18.5.1 Starting a Sensor Check ........................................................................................ 140
18.5.2 Stopping a Sensor Check ...................................................................................... 140
18.6 BIS Sensor Window ......................................................................................................... 141
18.7 Changing the BIS Smoothing Rate .................................................................................. 142
18.8 Switching Secondary Parameters On and Off .................................................................. 142
18.9 Changing the Scale of the EEG Wave .............................................................................. 142
18.10 Setting the Trend Length ................................................................................................ 142
18.11 Switching BIS Filters On or Off..................................................................................... 142
Chapter 19 Monitoring RM* ........................................................................................................ 143
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 143
19.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................................... 144
19.3 Sensor Setup ..................................................................................................................... 147
19.4 Zero Calibration ............................................................................................................... 148
19.5 Purging ............................................................................................................................. 148
19.5.1 Automatic Purging ................................................................................................ 148
19.5.2 Manual Purging ..................................................................................................... 148
19.6 Gas Compensation ........................................................................................................... 149
19.6.1 Changing the Concentration of Inspired O2 and Inspired Agents ......................... 149
19.6.2 Changing the Type of Balance Gas ....................................................................... 149
19.6.3 Changing the Temperature of the Inspired and Expired Gas ................................ 150
19.6.4 Changing the Humidity of the Inspired and Expired Gas ..................................... 150
19.7 RM Configuration ............................................................................................................ 150
19.7.1 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay......................................................................... 150
19.7.2 Selecting Measured Airway Volume Components ................................................ 150
19.7.3 Changing the Respiration Mode............................................................................ 150
19.7.4 Selecting Waveform .............................................................................................. 150
19.8 Respiratory Loops ............................................................................................................ 150
19.8.1 Viewing Loops ...................................................................................................... 151
19.8.2 Storing and Reviewing Loops ............................................................................... 151
19.8.3 Changing Loop Type ............................................................................................. 151
19.8.4 Showing/Hiding the Reference Loop .................................................................... 151
19.8.5 Resizing the Loops ................................................................................................ 151
Chapter 20 Monitoring ICG* ....................................................................................................... 152
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 152
20.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................................... 153
20.3 ICG Patient Cable ............................................................................................................ 153
20.4 Precautions and Limitations ............................................................................................. 154
20.5 Starting a Measurement.................................................................................................... 155
20.5.1 Measurement Procedure ........................................................................................ 155

VIII
20.5.2 ICG Sensor Application ........................................................................................ 155
20.5.3 Setting Patient Data ............................................................................................... 156
20.6 Selecting Secondary Parameters ...................................................................................... 156
Chapter 21 Freeze .......................................................................................................................... 157
21.1 Entering/Exiting Freeze Status ......................................................................................... 157
21.1.1 Entering Freeze Status........................................................................................... 157
21.1.2 Exiting Freeze Status............................................................................................. 157
21.2 Reviewing Frozen Waveform........................................................................................... 158
Chapter 22 Review ......................................................................................................................... 159
22.1 Trend Graph Review ........................................................................................................ 159
22.1.1 Selecting Trend Graph of Specific Parameter ....................................................... 159
22.1.2 Adjusting Trend Scale ........................................................................................... 159
22.1.3 Setting Resolution ................................................................................................. 160
22.1.4 Scrolling Left and Right the Screen ...................................................................... 160
22.1.5 Switching to the Trend Table ................................................................................ 160
22.1.6 Record ................................................................................................................... 160
22.2 Trend Table Review ......................................................................................................... 160
22.2.1 Setting Resolution ................................................................................................. 160
22.2.2 Scrolling the Screen .............................................................................................. 160
22.2.3 Switching to Trend Graph ..................................................................................... 160
22.2.4 Recording .............................................................................................................. 161
22.3 NIBP Review.................................................................................................................... 161
22.3.1 Scrolling the Screen .............................................................................................. 161
22.3.2 Recording .............................................................................................................. 161
22.4 Alarm Review................................................................................................................... 161
22.4.1 Scrolling the Screen .............................................................................................. 161
22.4.2 Selecting Alarm Event of Specific Parameter ....................................................... 161
22.4.3 Setting Time Index ................................................................................................ 161
22.5 Arr Review ....................................................................................................................... 162
22.5.1 Scrolling the Screen .............................................................................................. 162
22.5.2 Arrhythmia Alarm Review .................................................................................... 162
22.6 12-lead Diagnosis Review................................................................................................ 163
22.6.1 Scrolling the Screen .............................................................................................. 163
22.6.2 Deleting Diagnosis Results ................................................................................... 163
22.6.3 Switching Between Waveforms and Results ......................................................... 163
22.6.4 Recording .............................................................................................................. 163
Chapter 23 Calculation and Titration Table................................................................................ 164
23.1 Drug Calculation .............................................................................................................. 164
23.1.1 Calculation Procedures.......................................................................................... 164
23.1.2 Calculation Unit .................................................................................................... 165
23.1.3 Titration Table ....................................................................................................... 165
23.2 Hemodynamic Calculation ............................................................................................... 166
IX
23.2.1 Calculation Procedure ........................................................................................... 166
23.2.2 Input Parameters.................................................................................................... 166
23.2.3 Output Parameters ................................................................................................. 166
Chapter 24 Recording .................................................................................................................... 168
24.1 Performance of the Recorder ........................................................................................... 168
24.2 Starting and Stopping Recording ..................................................................................... 169
24.3 Recorder Operations and Status Messages ...................................................................... 170
24.3.1 Record Paper Requirement ................................................................................... 170
24.3.2 Proper Operation ................................................................................................... 170
24.3.3 Paper Out ............................................................................................................... 170
24.3.4 Replacing Paper .................................................................................................... 170
24.3.5 Removing Paper Jam............................................................................................. 171
Chapter 25 Printing Patient Reports............................................................................................ 173
25.1 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................. 173
25.2 Starting and Stopping Report Printing ............................................................................. 173
Chapter 26 Other Functions.......................................................................................................... 175
26.1 Nurse Call......................................................................................................................... 175
26.2 Wireless Network ............................................................................................................. 175
26.3 Storing Data in a Removable Device ............................................................................... 175
26.3.1 Data Stored in the Removable Device .................................................................. 175
26.3.2 Activating/ Deactivating Data Storing .................................................................. 176
26.3.3 Selecting a Removable Device.............................................................................. 176
26.3.4 Reviewing Data Stored in a Removable Device ................................................... 176
26.3.5 Deleting Data Stored in a Removable Device....................................................... 176
26.3.6 Ejecting a Removable Device ............................................................................... 177
Chapter 27 Using Battery .............................................................................................................. 178
27.1 Battery Safety Information ............................................................................................... 178
27.2 Battery Power Indicator ................................................................................................... 179
27.3 Battery Status on the Main Screen ................................................................................... 179
27.4 Checking Battery Performance ........................................................................................ 179
27.5 Replacing the Battery ....................................................................................................... 180
27.6 Recycling the Battery ....................................................................................................... 180
27.7 Maintaining the Battery.................................................................................................... 181
Chapter 28 Care and Cleaning ..................................................................................................... 182
28.1 General Points .................................................................................................................. 182
28.2 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... 182
28.2.1 Cleaning the Monitor ............................................................................................ 182
28.2.2 Cleaning the Accessories....................................................................................... 183
28.3 Disinfection ...................................................................................................................... 184
Chapter 29 Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 185
29.1 Inspecting ......................................................................................................................... 185
X
29.2 Maintenance Task and Test Schedule ............................................................................... 185
Chapter 30 Warranty and Service ................................................................................................ 187
30.1 Warranty ........................................................................................................................... 187
30.2 Contact information ......................................................................................................... 187
Chapter 31 Accessories .................................................................................................................. 188
31.1 ECG Accessories .............................................................................................................. 188
31.2 SpO2 Accessories ............................................................................................................. 190
31.3 NIBP Accessories ............................................................................................................. 190
31.4 Temp Accessories ............................................................................................................. 191
31.5 IBP Accessories ................................................................................................................ 192
31.6 CO2 Accessories ............................................................................................................... 192
31.7 C.O. Accessories .............................................................................................................. 193
31.8 AG Accessories ................................................................................................................ 193
31.9 BIS Accessories*.............................................................................................................. 194
31.10 RM Accessories*............................................................................................................ 194
31.11 ICG Accessories* ........................................................................................................... 194
31.12 Other Accessories ........................................................................................................... 195
A Product Specifications ................................................................................................................ 196
A.1 Classification ..................................................................................................................... 196
A.2 Physical Specifications ...................................................................................................... 196
A.3 Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................... 198
A.4 Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 200
A.5 Battery ............................................................................................................................... 201
A.6 Display .............................................................................................................................. 201
A.7 Indicators ........................................................................................................................... 201
A.8 Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 202
A.9 Data Storage ...................................................................................................................... 202
A.10 ECG ................................................................................................................................. 203
A.11 RESP ............................................................................................................................... 207
A.12 NIBP ................................................................................................................................ 208
A.13 SpO2 ................................................................................................................................ 210
A.14 TEMP .............................................................................................................................. 211
A.15 IBP................................................................................................................................... 212
A.16 CO2 .................................................................................................................................. 213
A.17 C.O. ................................................................................................................................. 217
A.18 AG ................................................................................................................................... 217
A.18.1 Sidestream ............................................................................................................ 217
A.18.2 Mainstream ........................................................................................................... 220
A.19 BIS................................................................................................................................... 223
A.20 RM ................................................................................................................................... 223
A.21 ICG .................................................................................................................................. 227
A.22 Interfaces ......................................................................................................................... 227
XI
A.22.1 Analog Output ...................................................................................................... 227
A.22.2 Defibrillator Synchronization............................................................................... 228
A.22.3 Nurse Call ............................................................................................................. 228
A.22.4 USB Interfaces ..................................................................................................... 229
A.22.5 VGA Interface ...................................................................................................... 229
A.22.6 DVI Interface*...................................................................................................... 229
A.22.7 RS232 Interface .................................................................................................... 229
A.22.8 PAM Interface* .................................................................................................... 229
A.22.9 Network Interface ................................................................................................. 230
B EMC Information ....................................................................................................................... 231
B.1 Electromagnetic Emissions - for all EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS................................. 231
B.2 Electromagnetic Immunity - for all EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS ................................. 231
B.3 Electromagnetic Immunity - for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING................................................................................................................ 233
B.4 Recommended Separation Distances ................................................................................ 234
C Default Settings........................................................................................................................... 236
C.1 Patient Information Default Settings ................................................................................. 236
C.2 Alarm Default Settings ...................................................................................................... 236
C.3 ECG Default Settings ........................................................................................................ 236
C.4 RESP.................................................................................................................................. 237
C.5 SpO2 ................................................................................................................................... 238
C.6 PR ...................................................................................................................................... 238
C.7 NIBP .................................................................................................................................. 239
C.8 TEMP ................................................................................................................................ 239
C.9 IBP ..................................................................................................................................... 240
C.10 CO2 .................................................................................................................................. 240
C.11 C.O. .................................................................................................................................. 241
C.12 AG.................................................................................................................................... 241
C.13 BIS ................................................................................................................................... 242
C.14 RM ................................................................................................................................... 242
C.15 ICG .................................................................................................................................. 243
D Abbreviation ............................................................................................................................... 245

XII
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

Chapter 1 Intended Use and Safety Guidance

1.1 Intended Use


This monitor is intended to be used for monitoring, storing, reviewing and recording of, and to
generate alarms for, multiple physiological parameters of adults, pediatrics and neonates in
hospital environments.
This monitor is suitable for use in hospital environments including but not limited to OR, PACU,
ICU, NICU, ER and CCU.
The monitored physiological parameters include: ECG, respiration (RESP), temperature (TEMP),
oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2), pulse rate (PR), non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP),
invasive blood pressure (IBP), carbon dioxide (CO2), cardiac output (C.O.), anesthetic gas (AG),
bispectral index (BIS), respiration mechanics (RM) and impedance cardiography (ICG).
BIS is intended for use on adult and pediatric patients.
ICG monitoring is intended for use on adults only.

1.2 Safety Guidance


Federal (U.S.) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

WARNING
1 Before using the device, the equipment, patient cable and electrodes etc. should be
checked. Replacement shall be taken if there is any evident defect or signs of aging
which may impair the safety or performance.
2 Medical technical equipment such as this monitor/monitoring system must only be
used by persons who have received adequate training in the use of such equipment
and who are capable of applying it properly.
3 SHOCK HAZARD-To avoid the RISK of electric shock, this equipment must only be
connected to a SUPPLY MAINS with protective earth.
4 EXPLOSION HAZARD-Do not use the device in a flammable atmosphere where
concentrations of flammable anesthetics or other materials may occur.
5 Do not come into contact with the patient, table, or the monitor during defibrillation.
6 The equipment can provide protective means to prevent the patient from being
burned when used with HF SURGICAL EQUIPMENT. The equipment can protect
against the effects of the discharge of a defibrillator.
7 The simultaneous use of cardiac pacemaker and other patient-connected equipment
may cause safety hazard.

-1-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

WARNING
8 Extreme care must be exercised when applying medical electrical equipment. Many
parts of the human/machine circuit are conductive, such as the patient, connectors,
electrodes, transducers. It is very important that these conductive parts do not come
into contact with other grounded, conductive parts when connected to the isolated
patient input of the device. Such contact would bridge the patient's isolation and
cancel the protection provided by the isolated input. In particular, there must be no
contact of the neutral electrode and ground.
9 Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper performance
of the device. For this reason make sure that all external devices operated in the
vicinity of the monitor comply with the relevant EMC requirements. X-ray equipment
or MRI devices are a possible source of interference as they may emit higher levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
10 Route all cables away from patient’s throat to avoid possible strangulation.
11 Devices connecting with monitor should be equipotential.
12 If the earth protection system is not stable, use the batteries for power supply.
13 Two batteries must be used when the monitor uses internal power supply.
14 Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC/EN standards. Furthermore all configurations shall
comply with the valid version of the standard IEC/EN 60601-1-1. Therefore anybody,
who connects additional equipment to the signal input or output connector to
configure a medical system, must make sure that it complies with the requirements of
the valid version of the system standard IEC/EN60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult our
technical service department or your local distributor.
15 The monitor is equipped with a wireless AP via network interface to receive RF
electromagnetic energy. Therefore, any other equipment complying with CISPR
radiation requirements may also interfere with the wireless communication and make
it interrupted.
16 Only use patient cable and other accessories supplied by the manufacturer. Or else,
the performance and electric shock protection can not be guaranteed, and the patient
may be injured. Prior to use, check if the casing of a disposable or sterilized
accessory is intact. Do not use it if its casing is damaged.
17 Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment
of alarm volume to a low level or off during patient monitoring may result in a hazard
to the patient. Remember that the most reliable method of patient monitoring
combines close personal surveillance with correct operation of monitoring equipment.

-2-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

WARNING
18 Wireless LAN equipment contains an intentional RF radiator that has the potential of
interfering with other medical equipment, including patient implanted devices. Be sure
to perform the electromagnetic compatibility test, as described in the Wireless LAN
System Installation, before installation and any time new medical equipment is added
to the Wireless LAN coverage area.
19 When interfacing with other equipment, a test for leakage current must be performed
by qualified biomedical engineering personnel before using with patients.
20 If multiple instruments are connected to a patient, the sum of the leakage currents
must not exceed the limits; or it may result in shock hazard.
21 During monitoring, if the power supply is off and there is no battery for standby, the
monitor will be off, and only the patient information and alarm settings can be saved.
After reconnecting the power supply, the user should turn on the monitor for
monitoring.
22 Keep away from fire immediately when leakage or foul odor is detected.
23 The device and accessories are to be disposed of according to local regulations after
their useful lives. Alternatively, they can be returned to the dealer or the manufacturer
for recycling or proper disposal. Batteries are hazardous waste. Do NOT dispose
them together with house-hold garbage. At the end of their life hand the batteries over
to the applicable collection points for the recycling of waste batteries. Inappropriate
disposals of waste may contaminate the environment. For more detailed information
about recycling of this product or battery, please contact your local Civic Office, or the
shop where you purchased the product.
24 The packaging is to be disposed of according to local or hospital’s regulations;
otherwise, it may cause environmental contamination. Place the packaging at the
place which is inaccessible to children.
25 After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct
electrodes are used and applied based on the manufacturers’ instructions.
26 Clinical decision making based on the output of the device is left to the discretion of
the provider.
27 This equipment is not intended for family usage.

-3-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

CAUTION
1 Electromagnetic Interference - Ensure that the environment in which the patient
monitor is installed is not subject to any sources of strong electromagnetic
interference, such as radio transmitters, mobile telephones, etc.
2 Keep the environment clean. Avoid vibration. Keep it far away from corrosive
medicine, dust area, high temperature and humid environment.
3 Do not immerse transducers in liquid. When using solutions, use sterile wipes to avoid
pouring fluids directly on the transducer.
4 The device and reusable accessories could be sent back to the manufacturer for
recycling or proper disposal after their useful lives.
5 Disposable devices are intended for single use only. They should not be reused as
performance could degrade or contamination could occur.
6 Remove a battery whose life cycle has expired from the monitor immediately.
7 Avoid liquid splash on the device.
8 To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories manufactured or
recommended by the manufacturer.
9 Before connecting the monitor to the AC power, make sure the voltage and the power
frequency are consistent with the requirements indicated on the device label or in this
user manual.
10 Protect the device against mechanical damage resulting from gravitation, collision,
powerful vibration and so on.
11 A drafty environment for monitor installation is required, and do not block up the
ventilation grille at the back of the device.
12 Federal (U.S.) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

NOTE:
1 Position the device in a location where the operator can easily see the screen and
access the operating controls.
2 The monitor can only be used on one patient at a time.
3 If the monitor gets damp or liquid pours on the monitor, please contact the service
personnel of the manufacturer.
4 This monitor is not a device for treatment purposes.
5 The pictures and interfaces in this manual are for reference only.
6 Regular preventive maintenance should be carried out every two years. You are
responsible for any requirements specific to your country.

-4-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

1.3 Explanation of Symbols on the Monitor


This symbol indicates that the equipment is IEC/EN60601-1 Type CF
equipment. The unit displaying this symbol contains an F-Type isolated
(floating) patient applied part providing a high degree of protection against
shock, and is suitable for use during defibrillation.
This symbol indicates that the instrument is IEC/EN 60601-1 Type BF
equipment. The unit displaying this symbol contains an F-Type isolated
(floating) patient applied part providing a high degree of protection against
shock, and is suitable for use during defibrillation.

Symbol for “Caution”

Equipotential grounding

Consult Instructions For Use

Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation

Alternating Current

Battery indicator

Chargeable battery

Power Supply switch

Serial number

Network port

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Audio alarm is off

NIBP measurement

Trend graph

-5-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

Freeze

Record

Menu

VGA output, External Monitor

RS-232 port

Nurse call port

SD Card port

Signal output port

Signal output

PAM connector

Date of manufacture

Manufacturer

P/N Part Number

Recycle

The symbol indicates that the device should be sent to the special agencies
according to local regulations for separate collection after its useful life.

Locked position

Gas inlet

Gas outlet (evac)

-6-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Intended Use and Safety Guidance

ISA equipped to measure CO2 only.

ISA equipped to measure multiple gases.

For single patient use

Federal (U.S.) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a


physician.

-7-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Installation

Chapter 2 Installation
NOTE:
1 The monitor settings must be specified by the authorized hospital personnel.
2 To ensure that the monitor works properly, please read the user manual and follow
the steps before using the monitor.

2.1 Initial Inspection


Before unpacking, check the packaging and ensure that there are no signs of mishandling or
damage. If the shipping cartons are damaged, contact the carrier for compensation and package
them again.
Open the package carefully and remove the monitor and accessories. Check that the contents are
complete and that the correct options and accessories have been delivered.
If you have any question, please contact your local supplier.

2.2 Mounting the Monitor


Place the monitor on a flat, level surface, hang it on the bed rail, or mount it on a wall. For
detailed information about how to install the wall mount for the monitor, please refer to the Wall
Mounting Bracket Assembly Instruction.

WARNING
1 The wall mounting bracket can be fixed only on a concrete wall.
2 The safe load of the top splint is 20kg. Overweight may cause the device to rupture
and even fall over.

2.3 Connecting the Power Cable


Before connecting the power cable, check if the fuse is well installed inside the connector. (Refer
to the illustration Rear View in the section 3.1.1 and locate “AC power input”.) The specification
of the fuse is T3.15AH250VP.
Connection procedure of the AC power line is listed below:
1 Make sure the AC power supply complies with the following specifications: 100V-240V~,
50Hz/60Hz, 1.8A to 0.75A.
2 Apply the power line provided with the monitor. Plug the power line to inlet interface of the
monitor. Connect the other end of the power line to a grounded power output.
NOTE:
1 Connect the power cable to the socket specialized for hospital use.
2 Only use the power cable supplied by the manufacturer.

-8-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Installation

2.4 Checking the Monitor


Make sure there is no damage on the measurement accessories and cables. Then turn on the
monitor, check whether the monitor can start normally. Make sure all alarm lamps light up and
the alarm sound is heard when turning on the monitor.

WARNING
If any sign of damage is detected, or the monitor displays some error messages, do not
use it on any patient. Contact Customer Service Center immediately.

NOTE:
1 Check all the functions of the monitor and make sure that the monitor is in good
status.
2 If rechargeable batteries are provided, charge them after using the device every time,
to ensure the electric power is enough.
3 The interval between double pressing of POWER switch should be longer than 1
minute.

2.5 Checking the Recorder


If your monitor is equipped with a recorder, open the recorder’s door to check if paper is properly
installed in the slot. If no paper exists, refer to Chapter 24 Recording for details.

2.6 Setting Date and Time


To set the date and time:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Date/Time Setup.
2. Adjust the date display format based on the user’s habit.
3. Set the correct time of year, month, day, hour, min and sec.
NOTE:
1 If the monitor is not used for a longer period of time, its system time may be
inaccurate. In this case, reset the system time after powering on the monitor.
2 If the system time cannot be saved and resumes the default value after restart,
contact the service department of the manufacturer to replace the button cell of the
main board.

-9-
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Installation

2.7 Handing Over the Monitor


If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it
is in the monitoring mode.
The users must be adequately trained to use the monitor before monitoring a patient. To achieve
this, they should have access to, and read, the following documentation delivered with the
monitor:
 User Manual (this book) - for full operating instructions.
 Quick Reference Card - for quick reminders during use.

- 10 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Chapter 3 Basic Operation


This user manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore your monitor may not
have all of the functions and options described in the manual. Also, illustrations in this manual
serve as examples only and do not necessarily reflect the setup on your monitor. The content
displayed on you monitor depends on the way it has been tailored for your hospital.

3.1 Overview
3.1.1 Main Unit
Front View

1
2
3

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

- 11 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

1 Alarm mute indicator When the audible alarm is mute, the indicator is
in red.

2 Physiological alarm When a physiological alarm occurs, the indicator


indicator lights on or flashes with different frequencies and
colors reflecting the alarm level.

3 Technical alarm When a technical alarm occurs, the indicator


indicator lights on or flashes with different frequencies and
colors reflecting the alarm level.

4 Display

5 Power supply switch Press it to turn the monitor on when the monitor
is connected to the AC power supply, or press the
key to turn the monitor off when the monitor is
on.

6 Battery indicator Refer to the section Battery Indicator for details.

7 AC power indicator When the monitor is connected to AC power, the


indicator is in green.

8 Mute Press it to suspend the output of all audible alarm


signals.

9 Start/stop NIBP Press it to start or stop blood pressure


measurement measurement.

10 Trend Press it to review the trend table.

11 Freeze/unfreeze Press it to freeze or unfreeze waveforms.

12 Start/stop recording Press it to start or stop recording.

13 Menu If no menu is displayed on the screen, pressing it


will enter the main menu. If there is a menu
displayed on the screen, pressing it will close that
menu.

14 Trim Knob Users can rotate the trim knob clockwise or


counter-clockwise to highlight the desired item,
and press it to select the item.

- 12 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Side View

2
3

4
7
5

1 Compartment for optional device (wireless network


module and hard disk)

2 XM module slot

3 XM module snap-fix

4 Plug-in module slots

5 Contact

6 Battery compartment latch

7 Compartment for recorder

NOTE:
To avoid bad contact caused by dust accumulation, clean the contacts regularly by
wiping them with a cotton swab moistened with alcohol.

- 13 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Rear View

14
2

3
4 15

7 11

8 9 10 11 12 13

- 14 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

1 Speaker For alarm tones, pulse tones and so forth.

2 Equipotential grounding If the monitor is used together with other


terminal devices, connect this terminal to eliminate
potential ground differences between devices.

3 Power cable safety latch Used to prevent the power cable from
detaching.

4 AC power input

5 RS232 interface Connect it to communicate with other devices.

6 Extended video interface It connects a secondary display, which extends


the display capability of your monitor.

7 SD card slot Used to mount an SD memory card.

8 VGA output It enables the VGA video output.

9 Nurse call port/analog If users select it as nurse call, it connects the


output monitor to the hospital’s nurse call system.
Alarms indications are alerted through the
nurse call system if configured to do so. If
users select it as analog output, the monitor
outputs the waveform through the port.

10 Defibrillator The monitor outputs the defibrillator


synchronization synchronization signal through the port.

11 USB interfaces They support USB1.0/2.0 output.

12 Network interface It connects the monitor to the central


monitoring system via standard network cable.

13 PAM connector It connects the Parameter Amplifier


Mainframe to the monitor.

14 Heat sink

15 Anti-thief lock

CAUTION
Connect only the Parameter Amplifier Mainframe to the PAM connector. Do not connect
any other device to this connector.

- 15 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

NOTE:
1 If incomplete display occurs on the screen of an external display connecting to the
monitor via the VGA output, adjust it with the button for automatic screen adapting of
the external display, or refer to its user manual.
2 The functions of nurse call, analog output and defibrillator synchronization are only
available when the XM module is inserted in the monitor.

3.1.2 Parameter Amplifier Mainframe


Users can connect one Parameter Amplifier Mainframe (PAM) to the monitor via a particular link
cable. The PAM provides 8 slots for mounting measurement modules. The number of modules
mounted in the PAM varies with the number of slots needed by different modules.

Front View
1

Rear View

- 16 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

1 Indicator
 On: when the PAM works normally;
 Off: when the PAM is disconnected from the monitor, power supply malfunction occurs
or the monitor is powered off.
2 Contact
3 Handle
4 PAM connector

NOTE:
To avoid bad contact caused by dust accumulation, clean the contacts regularly by
wiping them with a cotton swab moistened with alcohol.

3.1.3 Measurement Modules


Users can use a maximum of 8 measurement modules with the PAM and additional 3 modules in
the integrated module slots in the monitor. The number of modules mounted in the monitor varies
with the number of slots needed by different modules.
The connector socket on the front of each module is of the same color as the corresponding
connector plug on the transducer or patient cable.
Modules supported by this monitor are:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12

1 V-SpO2 module: Functional arterial oxygen saturation module

2 V-CO2 module (mainstream): Respironics carbon dioxide module for mainstream

- 17 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3 V-AG module (mainstream): Anesthetic gas module for mainstream

4 V-C.O. module: Cardiac output module

5 V-IBP module: Invasive blood pressure module

6 V-BIS module: Bispectral index module*

7 V-ICG module: Impedance cardiography module*

8 V-NIBP module: Omron non-invasive blood pressure module*

9 V-AG module (sidestream): Anesthetic gas module for sidestream

10 V-CO2 module (sidestream): Respironics carbon dioxide module for sidestream

11 V-CO2 module (sidestream): the manufacturer’s carbon dioxide module for sidestream*

12 V-RM module: Respiration mechanics module*


*Not available in the U.S.A.

Example Module
The structure of each plug-in module is similar: the module name is located at the bottom part;
hard keys are in the upper part; measurement connectors are in the lower part. Take the V-IBP
module for example:

1 4
2

1 Setup key: press to enter setup menu of the measurement module.


2 Indicator

- 18 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

 On: when the module works normally.


 Flash: when the module is being initialized or malfunctioning.
 Off: when the module is unconnected.
3 Connectors for transducer/sensor
4 Second module-specific key, such as the zero key for IBP.
5 Module name.

Plugging/ Unplugging Modules

Users can plug and unplug modules during monitoring.


 To plug a module, insert the module until the lever on the module clicks into place.
 To unplug a module, press the lever upwards and pull the module out.

NOTE:
Make sure the indicator on the module is on after the module is plugged in the monitor.
Otherwise, re-plug the module until the indicator is on.

3.1.4 XM Module
The XM module is integrated with functions of multiple measurement modules of ECG, RESP,
SpO2, TEMP, IBP and NIBP. Plug the XM module in the XM module slot on the left side of the
monitor, and it is connected with the monitor as shown below:

XM module
mounted on
the left of
the monitor

- 19 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Overview of XM Module
1 2 3

7
6

1 Setup key: press to enter the XM module setup menu.


2 Zero key: press to enter the zero IBP menu.
3 NIBP start/ stop key: press to start or stop NIBP measurement.
4 Indicator
 On: when the module works normally.
 Flash: when the module is being initialized or malfunctioning.
 Off: when the module is unconnected.
5 Module name
6 Connectors for transducer/sensor
7 Snap-fix
8 Connector to the monitor

Installing the XM Module


Mate the snap-fixes on the right side of the module with the slots on the rear of the monitor, and
push the module forwards until the lever clicks in place, then fasten the module with the snap-fix
on the left side of the monitor.

- 20 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3.2 Operating and Navigating


Everything you need to operate the monitor is contained on its screen. Almost every element on
the screen is interactive. Screen elements include measurement numerics, waveforms, screen keys,
information fields, alarms fields and menus. The configurability of the monitor means that often
you can access the same element in different ways. For example, you might be able to access an
item through its on-screen setup menu, via a hard key, or via a shortcut key. The User Manual
always describes how to access items via an on-screen menu. You may use whichever way you
find most convenient.

1 Department 10 Measurement setup key


2 Bed number 11 Scroll left to display more shortcut
keys
3 Patient name 12 Shortcut key area
4 Patient type 13 Symbol for AC power supply
5 Alarm status area 14 Symbol for battery status
6 Symbol for alarm off 15 Symbol for networking

- 21 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

7 Measurement value 16 Scroll right to display more


shortcut keys
8 Parameter waveform 17 Date and time
9 Mute key 18 Menu key

3.2.1 Using Keys

3.2.1.1 Permanent Keys


A permanent key is a graphical key that remains on the screen all the time to give you fast access
to functions.

To mute the audible alarm.

To display the measuring setup interface.

To display the main setup menu.

3.2.1.2 Shortcut Keys


A shortcut key is a configurable graphical key, located at the bottom of the main screen. It gives
you fast access to functions. The selection of shortcut keys available on your monitor depends on
your monitor configuration and on the options purchased.

- 22 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Perform a 12-lead analysis Switch to the standard screen

Exit from 12-lead analysis Switch to the OxyCRG screen

Access the 12-lead review Switch to the large font screen

Perform 12-lead record Set the module switch

Admit a patient Change the key volume

Review the trend graph Adjust the screen brightness

Review the trend table Zero the IBP sensor

Review the alarm event Alarm setup

Access the NIBP review Change the beat volume

Access the ARR review Enter standby mode

Switch to the trend screen Printer Setup

Switch to the vital screen Enter night mode

Select this item by the trim knob to enable the touch screen operation

- 23 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3.2.1.3 Hardkeys
A hardkey is a physical key on a monitoring device, such as the recording key on the front panel.
Refer to the illustration in 3.1.1 Main Unit for more information.

3.3 Setting Parameters


3.3.1 Accessing the Parameter Menu

Select on the bottom of the screen to enter the MeasureSet menu as shown below.
The display on your monitor may be configured to look slightly different depending on the
modules mounted.

This menu displays the measurement modules which have been mounted in the XM module slot,
three-slot module rack and PAM from top to bottom. Beside each measurement connector is the
measurement label. The color in which a measurement connector appears matches the status of
the measurement parameter.

Colored: indicates the module is activated.

Grey: indicates the module is deactivated.

- 24 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

Colored with a “!” appearing: indicates a module conflict.

For IBP connectors, with a circle-slash symbol appearing: indicates an IBP module
conflict.

For IBP connectors in the XM module: indicates this XM module is not configured with
an IBP module.

3.3.2 Activating / Deactivating a Parameter Measurement


For different measurement parameters, approaches to parameter activation / deactivation may
vary a little. Take the parameters ECG and NIBP in XM module for example:

 To activate / deactivate the ECG measurement, select the ECG connector in the XM module
on the MeasureSet menu, and set the ECG measurement to on or off on the pop-up
submenu.

 To activate / deactivated the NIBP measurement, select the NIBP connector in the XM
module on the MeasureSet menu, and the NIBP measurement will directly be activated /
deactivated.

3.3.3 Resolving Module Conflicts


This monitor supports a maximum of eight channels of IBP measurement. Both the XM module
and each V-IBP module provide two channels of IBP measurement. A maximum of four V-IBP
modules can be used simultaneously if the XM module is not used, while three if the XM module
is used. If eight channels of IBP measurement are loaded, another IBP module’s plugging in will

trigger an IBP module conflict; the corresponding IBP connector will be changed into on
the MeasureSet menu as an indication. To remove the IBP conflict, unplug the conflicting
module and re-plug it while less than eight channels of IBP are loaded.

For other modules, only one of the same type is available at a time; another one inserted will be
in the conflicting status. For example, if a CO2 module (module A) is loaded then another CO2
module (module B) is inserted, a symbol “!” in red will appear on the corresponding connector on
the MeasureSet menu to indicate a module conflict. To use module B, directly select the
connector of module B on the MeasureSet menu, and module A is consequently switched to be
in conflicting status. Especially, for resolving a BIS module conflict, you also need to disconnect
connection between the V-BIS module and the BISx device and reconnect the BISx device to the
V-BIS module which you need to use.

- 25 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3.3.4 Resolving IBP Label Conflicts


Each label must be unique and can only be assigned once. The measurement labels are stored in
the measurement modules. If you try to use two measurement modules that have identical labels,
this causes a label conflict in the monitor.

For example, an IBP module (module A) has already been loaded and the label Art is used for
module A. Then another IBP module (module B) is inserted and the label Art is also used for
module B. In this case, a label conflict will be triggered. A prompt indicating IBP label conflict
will appear on the left of the screen. Additionally, at the corresponding measurements area, two
labels flicker to indicate a label conflict. The label inside the brackets is the conflicting one while
the label outside the brackets is the default one assigned by the system. Via comparing the labels
displayed on the MeasureSet menu with the label outside the brackets, you may identify the
model with a label conflict and accordingly decide on the module to work.

The IBP module with a label conflict will not provide any measurement data; besides, the
functions of setup, zeroing and calibrating are unavailable. To resolve the label conflict, you have
to change the conflicting label into a non-conflicting one. Three resolutions are available:
Resolution 1:
1 Select the IBP channel with a label conflict on the screen and open the Options menu.
2 Choose another label among the options from the Alias pull-down list to resolve the label
conflict.
Resolution 2:
1 Deactivate the parameter with label A which works properly or unplug the corresponding
module.
2 The conflicting label A will consequently turn to be available.
Resolution 3:
1 Choose another label for label A which works properly.
2 The conflicting label A will consequently turn to be available.

3.4 Operating Mode


3.4.1 Demo Mode
To change the operating mode into the demo mode, please refer to the following procedure:
Select Menu > Common Function, then choose Demo Mode from the popup interface and input
password 3045.
To exit Demo Mode, select Menu > Common Function > Demo Mode to exit.

- 26 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

WARNING
Demo Mode is for demonstration purposes only. You must not change into Demo Mode
during monitoring. In Demo Mode, all stored trend information is deleted from the
monitor’s memory.

3.4.2 Standby Mode


Standby mode can be used when you want to temporarily interrupt monitoring. To enter standby

mode, please press the shortcut key on the screen directly. To resume monitoring, select
anything on the screen or press any key.

3.4.3 Night Mode


To switch to night mode, you may:

 Select the shortcut key on the main screen, or


 Select Menu> Common Function> Night Mode.
NOTE:
In night mode, the sound of key, heart beat and pulse is muted; the alarm volume and
screen brightness are down to their minimum; the settings including key volume, beat
volume, PR volume, alarm volume and screen brightness are unavailable.

3.5 Changing Monitor Settings


3.5.1 Adjusting Screen Brightness
To change the screen brightness:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select Menu > Common Function > Brightness, and select the appropriate setting for the
screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, 1 is the least bright.

3.5.2 Changing Date and Time


To change the date and time, please refer to Section Setting Date and Time.

WARNING
A change in date and time will influence the storage of trend data.

- 27 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3.6 Adjusting Volume


3.6.1 Adjusting Key Volume
The key volume is the volume you hear when you select any field on the monitor screen or when
you turn the knob. To adjust the key volume:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select Menu > System Setup > Key Volume, then select the appropriate setting for the key
volume: five bars represent the maximum volume and one bar represents the minimum
volume. If none of bars are selected, the key volume will be off.

3.6.2 Adjusting Alarm Volume


To change the alarm volume, please

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select Menu > Alarm Setup and select the desired setting for the AlarmVolume item: five
bars represent the maximum volume and one bar represents the minimum volume.

3.6.3 Adjusting Beat Volume


Beat volume is from HR or PR, depending on your setting of the alarm source. To change the
beat volume:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select ECG Setup > Beat Volume, then select the appropriate setting for the beat volume:
five bars represent the maximum volume and one bar represents the minimum volume. If
none of bars are selected, the beat volume will be off.

3.7 Checking Your Monitor Version


To check the monitor version, please select Menu > Common Function > About to check the
monitor software revision.

3.8 Networked Monitoring


Your monitor can be connected to the wired network and the wireless network. If the monitor is
networked, a network symbol is displayed on the screen.
NOTE:
Be aware that some network-based functions may be limited for monitors on wireless
networks in comparison to those on wired networks.

- 28 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Basic Operation

3.9 Setting Languages


To change the language, please:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, then type the correct password ABC into the
displayed interface.
2. Select the Language option on the popup interface to open the language list.
3. Select the desired language from the list. To make the change valid, please restart the
monitor.

3.10 Calibrating Screens


To calibrate the screen, please refer to the following steps:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, input the user password ABC, and select
TouchScr Calibration on the User Maintain menu.

2. The symbol appears on the screen.

3. Click on the central point of the symbol .


4. After the screen calibration is finished, it will return to the User Maintain menu.

3.11 Disabling the Touch Screen

The user can disable touch screen operation by selecting and holding the permanent key
for three seconds. A message of Screen Locked and the symbol will be displayed at the
bottom of screen. To enable the touch screen operation, select the symbol by using the knob.

3.12 Using the Bar Code Scanner


To enter the barcode setup menu, select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, after entering
the required password ABC, select Other Setup > BarCode Setup. You can configure the
settings such as MRN, Last Name, First Name and so on.

- 29 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarms

Chapter 4 Alarms
WARNING
A potential hazard can exist if different alarm presets are used for the same or similar
equipment in any single area, e.g. an intensive care unit or cardiac operating room.

4.1 Alarm Category


The monitor provides two types of alarm: physiological alarms and technical alarms. Also, the
monitor provides prompts.

4.1.1 Physiological alarms


If one or several physiological parameters of the currently monitored patient exceed the
predefined alarm limit, the monitor will give an alarm, and this type of alarm is called
physiological alarms. About the detailed alarm information, please refer to the Section
physiological alarm information.

4.1.2 Technical Alarms


If one or several technical status of the device is in abnormal status, the monitor will give an
alarm. And this type of alarm is called technical alarms. Technical alarms can’t be disabled.
About the detailed alarm information, please refer to Section technical alarm information.

4.1.3 Prompts
The monitor can give the character indication of monitoring process or other functions. And this
character is called prompts. About the detailed alarm information, please refer to Section
Prompts.

4.2 Alarm Levels


In terms of severity, the device’s alarm levels can be classified into three categories: high level
alarms, medium level alarms and low level alarms.
1. High level alarms
A high level alarm intensively warns the operator of a high priority alarm condition which
requires immediate operator response. Failure to respond to the cause of the alarm condition
is likely to result in death or irreversible injury of the patient.
2. Medium level alarms
A medium level alarm warns the operator of a medium priority alarm condition which
requires prompt operator response. Failure to respond to the cause of the alarm condition is
likely to result in reversible injury of the patient.

- 30 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarms

3. Low level alarms


A low level alarm reminds the operator of a low priority alarm condition which requires
response. And the response time for a low priority alarm condition can be greater than that for
a medium priority alarm condition. Failure to respond to the cause of the alarm condition is
likely to result in discomfort or reversible minor injury of the patient.
Alarm Sound
The high/medium/low-level alarms are indicated by the system in following different audio ways:
Alarm level Prompt
Mode is “DO-DO-DO------DO-DO, DO-DO-DO------DO-DO”, which
High is triggered once every 10 seconds. The alarm indicator flashes in red,
with frequency of 1.4Hz~2.8Hz.
Mode is “DO-DO-DO”, which is triggered once every 25 seconds. The
Medium
alarm indicator flashes in yellow, with frequency of 0.4Hz~0.8Hz.
Low Mode is “DO-”, which is triggered once every 30 seconds.

The sound pressure range for audible alarm signals is from 45 dB to 85 dB.

WARNING
1 Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring.
Adjustment of alarm volume to a low level or off during patient monitoring may result
in patient danger. Remember that the most reliable method of patient monitoring
combines close personal surveillance with correct operation of monitoring
equipment.
2 When the sound pressure of audible alarm is equivalent to the ambient noise, it may
be difficult for the operator to distinguish the audible alarm.

4.3 Controlling Alarm


4.3.1 Setting Parameter Alarm
Parameter alarm settings including alarm switch, alarm record, alarm level and alarm limit are
available on the respective alarm setup menu for each parameter. To access the menu for

parameter alarm settings, use the shortcut key or select Menu> Alarm Setup, and then
click Alarm Options to open the menu shown below for alarm settings of each parameter. Also,
you can access this menu via the respective parameter setup menu.

- 31 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarms

Upper arrow or
lower arrow to
increase or
decrease the High
alarm limit Alarm Limit

Setting value of
high alarm limit

Setting value of Low


low alarm limit Alarm Limit

WARNING
1 When the alarm is set to OFF, the monitor won’t give an alarm prompt even if an
alarm occurs. In order to avoid endangering the patient’s life, the user should use this
function cautiously.
2 Prior to monitoring, make sure that the alarm limit settings are appropriate for your
patient.
3 Setting alarm limits to extreme values may cause the alarm system to become
ineffective. It is recommended to use the default settings.

4.3.2 Temporary Alarm Mute

You can pause an auditory alarm for an activated alarm condition by pressing the key on
the front panel.
While the auditory alarm is paused, the alarm is not sounding. But the alarm indicator on the
front panel and the graphical alarm indicator on the screen are still flashing. Additionally, in the
alarm area:

1. The monitor displays the auditory alarm pause symbol .


2. The monitor displays the remaining pause time in seconds with a red background.
The user can set the duration of auditory alarm pause to 60 s, 120 s, or 180 s.
NOTE:
If a new alarm occurs during alarm pause, the auditory alarm pause will terminate and the
new alarm will be sounding.

- 32 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarms

4.3.3 Alarm Mute


To mute the alarm, please select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Alarm Setup, and

set Mute to On, then press the key on the front panel and hold it for more than three
seconds or press the Mute shortcut key on the screen directly.
While the auditory alarm is muted, the alarm is not sounding. But the alarm indicator on the front
panel and the graphical alarm indicator on the screen are still flashing. And the alarm reminder
tone DO is heard every three minutes. Additionally, in the alarm area:

1. The monitor displays the alarm mute symbol .


2. The monitor displays Alarm Mute with a red background.
NOTE:
If a new alarm occurs during the alarm mute period, the alarm mute period will terminate
and the new alarm will be sounding.

4.4 Latching Alarms


To configure the alarm latching setting, select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Alarm
Setup and choose Alarm Latch which can be set to On or Off. When it is set to Off, alarm
indications end when the alarm condition ends. When it is set to On, the visual alarm indication
is still displayed after the alarm condition ends; meanwhile, the alarm time is also displayed for
the latched alarm for your reference. The indication lasts until you acknowledge the alarm.

You can use the key on the front panel or the permanent key on the screen to
acknowledge the latched alarm.

4.5 Disabling Sensor off Alarms


To set sensor off alarm, please select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain and enter the
required password ABC. Then select Alarm Setup and set Sensor Off Alm from the pull-down
list. If it is set to On, and a sensor off alarm occurs, the user can press the Mute key on the front
panel to disable the alarm signal. Then the alarm indicator stops flashing, and the monitor is in
temporary mute alarm status. If the user presses the Mute key again or the temporary mute time
ends, no audible alarm for sensor-off status will be resumed. Instead, sensor-off status will be
announced with a prompt message.

4.6 Testing Alarms


When you switch the monitor on, a self test is started. You must check that the alarm indicator
lights and that you hear a single tone. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm indicators
are functioning correctly. For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the
measurement on yourself or use a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check that appropriate alarm
behavior is observed.

- 33 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Chapter 5 Alarm Information


5.1 Physiological Alarm Information
WARNING
During monitoring, the physiological alarms including ASYSTOLE, VFIB/VTAC, RESP
APNEA, SpO2 No Pulse, CO2 APNEA, AG FiO2 Low, AG APNEA and RM Apnea are
preset to be on and cannot be turned off.

Message Cause Alarm level


HR High HR measuring value is above the upper alarm limit. User-selectable
HR Low HR measuring value is below the lower alarm limit. User-selectable
ST measuring value is above the upper alarm limit. (X
ST-X High stands for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, User-selectable
V4, V5 or V6)
ST measuring value is below the lower alarm limit.(X
ST-X Low stands for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, User-selectable
V4, V5 or V6)
PVCs High PVCs measuring value is above the upper alarm limit. User-selectable
ASYSTOLE No QRS is detected for 4 consecutive seconds High
Ventricular fibrillation/Ventricular tachycardia: The
VFIB/VTAC RR interval of 4-second fibrillation wave or 5 High
consecutive ventricular beats is less than 600 ms.
VT>2 3< the number of cluster PVCs < 5 User-selectable
COUPLET 2 consecutive PVCs User-selectable
BIGEMINY Vent Bigeminy User-selectable
TRIGEMINY Vent Trigeminy User-selectable
A type of single PVC under the condition that
HR<100,R-R interval is less than 1/3 the average
R ON T interval, followed by a compensating pause of 1.25X User-selectable
the average R-R interval (the next R wave advances
onto the previous T wave).
PVC Single PVC detected in normal heartbeats. User-selectable
Adult: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval <
0.5s (HR range: 120bpm to 300bpm).
TACHY User-selectable
Pediatric/neonatal: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR
interval < 0.375s (HR range: 160bpm to 350bpm).

- 34 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm level


Adult: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval ≥
1.5s (HR range: 15bpm to 40bpm).
BRADY User-selectable
Pediatric/neonatal: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR
interval ≥ 1s (HR range: 15bpm to 60bpm).
When HR is less than 120 beats/min., no heart beat is
tested during the period 1.75 times of the average RR
MISSED BEATS interval; or User-selectable
When HR is ≥ 120 beats/min, no beat is tested within 1
second.
IRREGULAR RHYTHM: The patient has irregular
IRR User-selectable
heart rate.
PACE NOT CAPTURE: After the pacemaker is
PNC paced, QRS complex can not be detected during User-selectable
300ms.
PACER NOT PACED: After the QRS complex, no
PNP User-selectable
pace is detected during 1.75 times of RR interval.
VENTRICULAR BRADYCARDIA: The interval of 5
VBRADY User-selectable
consecutive ventricular wave is more than 1000 ms.
VENTRICULAR RHYTHM: The interval of 5
VENT consecutive ventricular wave ranges from 600 ms to User-selectable
1000 ms.
RESP can not be measured within the set apnea alarm
RESP APNEA High
delay time.
RR High RR measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
RR Low RR measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
SpO2 High SpO2 measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
SpO2 Low SpO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
The signal of the measurement site is too weak, so the
SpO2 No Pulse High
monitor can’t detect the pulse signal.
PR High PR measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PR Low PR measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Measuring value of T1 channel is above upper alarm
T1 High User-selectable
limit.
Measuring value of T1 channel is below lower alarm
T1 Low User-selectable
limit.
Measuring value of T2 channel is above upper alarm
T2 High User-selectable
limit.

- 35 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm level


Measuring value of T2 channel is below lower alarm
T2 Low User-selectable
limit.
Measuring value of TD channel is above upper alarm
TD High User-selectable
limit.
SYS High SYS measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
SYS Low SYS measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
DIA High DIA measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
DIA Low DIA measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
MAP High MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
MAP Low MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PR measuring value from the NIBP module is above
PR (NIBP) High User-selectable
upper alarm limit.
PR measuring value from the NIBP module is below
PR (NIBP) Low User-selectable
lower alarm limit.
Art SYS High Art SYS measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art SYS Low Art SYS measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Art DIA High Art DIA measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art DIA Low Art DIA measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Art MAP High Art MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art MAP Low Art MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA SYS High PA SYS measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA SYS Low PA SYS measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA DIA High PA DIA measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA DIA Low PA DIA measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA MAP High PA MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA MAP Low PA MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
CVP MAP High CVP MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
CVP MAP Low CVP MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
ICP MAP High ICP MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
ICP MAP Low ICP MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
LAP MAP High LAP MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
LAP MAP Low LAP MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
RAP MAP High RAP MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable

- 36 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm level


RAP MAP Low RAP MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 SYS High P1 SYS measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 SYS Low P1 SYS measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 DIA High P1 DIA measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 DIA Low P1 DIA measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 MAP High P1 MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 MAP Low P1 MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 SYS High P2 SYS measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 SYS Low P2 SYS measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 DIA High P2 DIA measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 DIA Low P2 DIA measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 MAP High P2 MAP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 MAP Low P2 MAP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtCO2 High EtCO2 measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtCO2 Low EtCO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiCO2 High FiCO2 measuring value is above alarm limits. User-selectable
In the set apnea alarm delay time interval, no RESP
CO2 APNEA High
can be detected using CO2 module.
AwRR High AwRR measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
AwRR Low AwRR measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtCO2 (AG) measuring value is above upper alarm
EtCO2 (AG) High User-selectable
limit.
EtCO2 (AG) measuring value is below lower alarm
EtCO2 (AG) Low User-selectable
limit.
FiCO2 (AG) High FiCO2 (AG) measuring value is above alarm limits. User-selectable
AwRR (AG) measuring value is above upper alarm
AwRR (AG) High User-selectable
limit.
AwRR (AG) measuring value is below lower alarm
AwRR (AG) Low User-selectable
limit.
EtO2 High EtO2 measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtO2 Low EtO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiO2 High FiO2 measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiO2 Low FiO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtN2O High EtN2O measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable

- 37 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm level


EtN2O Low EtN2O measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiN2O High FiN2O measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiN2O Low FiN2O measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtHAL High EtHAL measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtHAL Low EtHAL measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiHAL High FiHAL measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiHAL Low FiHAL measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtENF High EtENF measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtENF Low EtENF measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiENF High FiENF measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiENF Low FiENF measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtISO High EtISO measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtISO Low EtISO measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiISO High FiISO measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiISO Low FiISO measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtSEV High EtSEV measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtSEV Low EtSEV measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiSEV High FiSEV measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiSEV Low FiSEV measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
EtDES High EtDES measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
EtDES Low EtDES measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiDES High FiDES measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
FiDES Low FiDES measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
AG FiO2 Low FiO2 measure value is extremely low. High
In the set apnea alarm delay time interval, no RESP
AG APNEA High
can be detected using AG module.
TB High TB measuring value is above upper alarm. User-selectable
TB Low TB measuring value is below lower alarm. User-selectable
BIS High BIS measuring value is above upper alarm. User-selectable
BIS Low BIS measuring value is below lower alarm. User-selectable
In a specific time interval, no respiration can be
RM Apnea High
detected by RM module.

- 38 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm level


AwRR (RM) AwRR (RM) measuring value is above upper alarm
User-selectable
High limit.
AwRR (RM) measuring value is below lower alarm
AwRR (RM) Low User-selectable
limit.
PEEP High PEEP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PEEP Low PEEP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PIP High PIP measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PIP Low PIP measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
MVe High MVe measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
MVe Low MVe measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
CI High CI measuring value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
CI Low CI measuring value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable

- 39 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

5.2 Technical Alarm Information


NOTE:
The ECG alarm information listed in the below table describes the lead names in
America. For the corresponding lead names in Europe, please refer to the section
Installing Electrodes.
Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken
1) The drive electrode or
Make sure that all
more than one ECG limb
electrodes, leads and
ECG Lead Off electrode falls off the skin; Low
patient cables are
2) ECG cables fall off the
properly connected.
monitor.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode LL falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG LL Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
LL falls off the monitor.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode LA falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG LA Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
LA falls off the monitor.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode RA falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG RA Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
RA falls off the monitor.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable V Low
patient cables are
falls off the monitor.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V1 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V1 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V1 falls off.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V2 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V2 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V2 falls off.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V3 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V3 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V3 falls off.
properly connected.

- 40 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Make sure that all
ECG electrode V4 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V4 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V4 falls off.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V5 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V5 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V5 falls off.
properly connected.
Make sure that all
ECG electrode V6 falls off
electrodes, leads and
ECG V6 Lead Off the skin or the ECG cable Low
patient cables are
V6 falls off.
properly connected.
Check lead
ECG measuring value is
ECG Signal Exceed High connection and
beyond measuring range.
patient condition
Stop measuring
function of ECG
ECG module failure or module, and notify
ECG Comm Fail High
communication failure biomedical engineer
or manufacturer’s
service staff.

Check lead
ECG measuring signal is
ECG Noise Low connection and
greatly interrupted.
patient condition

Stop measuring
function of RESP
RESP module failure or module, and notify
RESP Comm Fail High
communication failure biomedical engineer
or the manufacturer’s
service staff.
Check whether
interference to the
respiratory signal
exists. And check
RR measuring value is out whether the patient is
RR Exceed Medium
of the measure range. breathing normally;
breathing too rapidly
or too slowly may
endanger patient’s
life.

- 41 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Check whether the
patient is breathing
normally. Take
measures to help the
patient breathe
normally when
No RESP waveform can be
necessary. If the
detected due to apnea or
RESP Cardiac Artifact High patient is breathing
shallow breathing of the
normally, try to
patient.
adjust the electrode
position on the
patient in order to
reduce the
interference of
cardiogenic artifact.
Check whether the
RESP leads are well
RR cannot be measured due
RESP Noise Low connected. Keep the
to patient movement.
patient calm for
better monitoring.
Make sure the sensor
SpO2 sensor may be
is well connected to
SpO2 Sensor Off disconnected from the Low
the patient’s finger
patient or the monitor.
or other parts.

Malfunction in the SpO2 Replace the SpO2


SpO2 Sensor Err sensor or in the extension Low sensor or the
cable. extension cable.

SpO2 sensor was not Make sure the


connected well or monitor and sensor
SpO2 No Sensor Low
connected to the monitor, or is well connected,
the connection is loose. reconnect the sensor.
Stop using
measuring function
of SpO2 module, and
SpO2 module failure or
SpO2 Comm Fail High notify biomedical
communication failure
engineer or
manufacturer’s
service staff.

- 42 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Reconnect the SpO2
sensor and change
The pulse signal is too the measurement
weak or the perfusion of site. If problem
SpO2 Low Perfusion Low
the measurement site is too exists, please notify
low biomedical engineer
or manufacturer’s
service staff.
Check the condition
There is interference with
of patient and avoid
SpO2 measurement signals
SpO2 Noisy Signal Low patient movement;
and the waveform is
make sure the cable
abnormal.
is well connected.
Reduce interference
of the ambient light
SpO2 Light Ambient light around the
Low and avoid sensor’s
Interference sensor is too strong.
exposure to strong
light.
Stop using
measuring function
of NIBP module, and
NIBP module failure or
NIBP Comm Fail High notify biomedical
communication failure
engineer or
manufacturer’s
service staff.

Check the
connections and the
NIBP pump, valve, cuff or
NIBP Leak Low wrapped cuff to see
tube has a leakage.
whether they are all
prepared well.

Measure again, if
failure persists, stop
measuring function
NIBP Excessive Pressure has exceeded the of NIBP module and
Low
Pressure specified upper safety limit. notify biomedical
engineer or
manufacturer’s
service staff.

- 43 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Measure again, if
failure persists, stop
measuring function
NIBP Init Pressure The initial pressure is too of NIBP module and
Low
High high during measuring notify biomedical
engineer or
manufacturer’s
service staff.

Notify biomedical
HW Excessive Hardware excessive engineer or
High
Pressure pressure protection manufacturer’s
service staff.

Measure again or use


Measuring time has
NIBP Time Out Low other measuring
exceeded the specified time.
method.

If failure persists,
stop using measuring
function of NIBP
Sensor or other hardware
NIBP Self Test Error High module and notify
errors.
biomedical engineer
or manufacturer’s
service staff.

The cuff type used isn’t Confirm the patient


NIBP Cuff Type Error consistent with the patient Low type and change the
type. cuff.

- 44 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken

Check whether the


airway is occluded
or pressure sensor
Malfunction in pressure
Air Pressure Error Low works properly. If
sensor or valve
the problem still
exists, contact your
service personnel.

Contact your service


NIBP System Failure Malfunction in hardware High
personnel.

Check the
connection of the
cuff and try again. If
Cuff is too loose or patient
NIBP Weak Signal Low failure persists, use
pulse is too weak.
other methods to
measure blood
pressure.

Maybe the patient blood Use other methods to


NIBP Range Exceeded pressure value is beyond the Low measure blood
measurement range. pressure.

Cuff is not properly


Properly wrap the
NIBP Loose Cuff wrapped or no cuff is Low
cuff.
connected.

Make sure that the


Signal noise is too large or patient under
NIBP Interference Low
pulse rate is not regular. monitoring is
motionless.
Temperature cable of TEMP
Make sure that the
channe1 may be
TEMP T1 Sensor Off Low cable is properly
disconnected from the
connected
monitor.

- 45 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Temperature cable of TEMP
Make sure that the
channe2 may be
TEMP T2 Sensor Off Low cable is properly
disconnected from the
connected.
monitor.

Check sensor
TEMP1 measuring value is
Excessive T1 High connection and
beyond measuring range.
patient condition

Check sensor
TEMP2 measuring value is
Excessive T2 High connection and
beyond measuring range.
patient condition

Stop measuring
function of TEMP
TEMP module failure or module, and notify
TEMP Comm Fail High
communication failure. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.

Please check whether


T1 Calibration Failed T1 calibration failed. High the module works
properly.

Please check whether


T2 Calibration Failed T2 calibration failed High the module works
properly.

YY Sensor Off (YY


stands for the IBP label Check the sensor
name: Art, PA, CVP, IBP sensor falls off. Medium connection and
RAP, LAP, ICP, P1 reconnect the sensor.
and P2)
Stop measuring
function of IBP
IBP module failure or module, and notify
IBP Comm Fail High
communication failure biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.

- 46 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Stop measuring of
C.O. module, or
C.O. module failure or notify biomedical
CO Comm Fail High
communication failure engineer or
Manufacturer’s
service staff.
C.O. TI sensor not Insert injective
CO TI Sensor Off Low
connected temperature sensor.
C.O. TB sensor not
CO TB Sensor Off Low Insert TB sensor.
connected
Stop measuring
function of AG
AG module failure or module, and notify
AG Comm Fail High
communication failure. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Zeroing of AG module is Perform zero
AG Zero Required Medium
required. calibration.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Replacement of the O2 module, and notify
AG Replace O2 Sensor Medium
sensor is required. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
No adapter is connected or Connect the adapter
AG Check Adapter the adapter needs to be Low correctly or replace
replaced. the adapter.
Stop measuring
function of AG
O2 sensor requires module, and notify
O2 Cali Required Medium
calibration. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Software Error High
software. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.

- 47 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Hardware Error High
hardware. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Motor Error High
motor. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
AG module calibration is module, and notify
AG Uncalibrated High
not completed. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the O2
module, and notify
O2 Sensor Error sensor inside the sidestream High
biomedical engineer
AG module.
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Replacement of the adapter
AG Replace Adapter Medium Replace the adapter.
is required.
The sampling tube is Replace the sampling
Sample Line Occluded Medium
occluded. tube.
Connect the adapter
AG No Adapter No adapter is connected. Medium
correctly.
Connect the
No sampling tube is
No Sample Line Medium sampling tube
connected.
correctly.
Stop measuring
function of AG
The CO2 concentration
module, and notify
CO2 Out Of Range exceeds the accuracy range High
biomedical engineer
of AG module.
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.

- 48 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Stop measuring
function of AG
The N2O concentration
module, and notify
N2O Out Of Range exceeds the accuracy range High
biomedical engineer
of AG module.
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
The anesthesia gas function of AG
concentration exceeds the module, and notify
AA Out Of Range High
accuracy range of AG biomedical engineer
module. or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
The O2 concentration
module, and notify
O2 Out Of Range exceeds the accuracy range High
biomedical engineer
of AG module.
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
The temperature of the AG Make sure the AG
AG TEMP Out Of module exceeds the module is used
High
Range specified working within the specified
temperature range. temperature range.
Make sure the AG
The barometric pressure
module is used
AG Baro Press Out Of exceeds the specified
High within the specified
Range working barometric
barometric pressure
pressure range.
range.
Two types of anesthetic Adjust the
AG Mixed Agents agents are present in the gas concentration of the
Low
MAC<3 mixture, and the anesthetic agents if
concentration is low. necessary.
Two types of anesthetic Adjust the
AG Mixed Agents agents are present in the gas concentration of the
Medium
MAC≥3 mixture, and the anesthetic agents if
concentration is high. necessary.

- 49 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


1) Mainstream: The airway
1) Perform a zeroing
adapter was replaced
after replacing the
without a zeroing.
adapter.
2) More than 2 anesthetic
2) Reduce the
agents are present in the
number of anesthetic
AG AA Id Unreliable breathing circuit. Medium
agent types.
3) High concentrations of
3) Replace the
solvents, cleaning agents or
sampling tube or
other interfering gases are
reduce the interfering
present in the breathing
gases.
circuit.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Calibration of the module, and notify
AG Calibration Fail Medium
sidestream AG module fails. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
The sampling tube is Replace the sampling
AG Occlusion High
occluded. tube.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Initial. Failed High
module. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Data Limit Error High
module. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
Malfunction in the AG module, and notify
AG Usa Error High
module. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Perform a zeroing
Zeroing of the AG module
AG Zref Failed High following the
fails.
instructions.

- 50 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Stop measuring
function of AG
AG Change Oxygen Replacement of the oxygen module, and notify
High
Sensor sensor is required. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop measuring
function of AG
AG No Oxygen The oxygen sensor is module, and notify
High
Sensor disconnected. biomedical engineer
or Manufacturer’s
service staff.

CO2 module failure or Check if the water


CO2 Comm. Failed High
communication failure tray has been fixed.

Disconnect the
sampling cannula or
adapter from the
airway; initiate the
CO2 Zero Required Zero calibration failure Low zeroing before
making sure that no
expired air is inside
the sampling cannula
and adapter.
1) For the
Respironics CO2
module: Check
1) For the Respironics CO2
whether the adapter
module: The cannula is off
is properly connected
or disconnected.
or replace the
CO2 Check Adapter 2) For the manufacturer’s Low
adapter.
CO2 module: The water trap
2) For the
is disconnected or not
manufacturer’s CO2
properly connected.
module: Properly
connect the water
trap.
Stop using
CO2 measure value exceeds measuring function
CO2 Sensor Over
the measure range of the High of CO2 module,
Temp
monitor. notify biomedical
engineer.

- 51 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken

Water trap of SideStream is Make sure the gas


CO2 Occlude High
occluded. exhaust works well

The CO2 concentration


Reduce CO2
CO2 Out Of Range exceeds the accuracy range High
concentration.
of CO2 module.

Stop measuring
function of CO2
CO2 Sensor Faulty CO2 module failure High
module, notify
biomedical engineer.
1) Disconnection between
the V-BIS module and BISx Properly connect
BIS Comm Fail device. High cables and well
2) BISx device stops connect the module.
operating.
1) The sensor is not
BIS Sensor Not properly connected. Reconnect the sensor
Low
Connected 2) PIC is not properly or PIC.
connected.
1) Wrong sensor type.
BIS Sensor Type Error 2) Use the sensor on Low Replace the sensor.
neonatal patients.

The sensor was attached to


BIS Sensor Usage >
the monitor for more than Low Replace the sensor.
24hrs
24 hours.

Examine sensor
connection or replace
Sensor malfunction the sensor. And then
including sensor over click Continue in
BIS Sensor Error current, sensor ground Low the BIS Sensor
element (positive and Fault window which
negative) failure. appears on the screen
or reconnect the
V-BIS module.

- 52 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


1) The BIS sensor is invalid
1) Replace the
or not supported by the
sensor.
BIS Sensor Invalid BISx device. Low
2) Connect the
2) The sensor is not
sensor properly.
properly connected
The sensor can be
used as long as it
passes the impedance
check, which,
BIS Sensor Expired The sensor expired. Low
however, may affect
the measurements.
Replace the sensor if
necessary.

The sensor has been used


BIS No More Uses For
too many times and cannot Low Replace the sensor.
This Sensor
be used any more.

Check the
The impedance is above the
BIS High Impedance Low senor-to-skin
limit
contact.

Check the
Electrode has no skin
BIS Lead Off Low senor-to-skin
contact.
contact.

Check the
There is electrical
BIS Noise Low senor-to-skin
interference.
contact.

1) Check the
senor-to-skin
contact.
2) The SQI value
Bad BIS SQI SQI <15 Medium
will be influenced by
impedance check for
the ground electrode
and sensor check.

- 53 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


1) Check the
senor-to-skin
contact.
2) The SQI value
Poor BIS SQI 15 ≤SQI <50 Low
will be influenced by
impedance check for
the ground electrode
and sensor check.

Artifact, such as those Attempt to identify


BIS Artifact generated by motion or eye Low and eliminate artifact
blinks. source.

Check if the module


is properly
connected. Stop
using measuring
RM Communicate
RM module failure High function of RM
Stop
module, and notify
biomedical engineer
or manufacturer’s
service staff.
Stop using
measuring function
RM module has malfunction of RM module, and
RM Flow Module
in the memory, barometric High notify biomedical
Faulty
pressure or hardware. engineer or
Manufacturer’s
service staff.

The flow sensor may be


Check the sensor
RM Flow Sensor Off disconnected from the Low
connection.
patient or the monitor.

Check consistency of
Mismatch of sensor type
RM Flow Sensor Error Low sensor type and
and patient type.
patient type.

- 54 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Check if the module
is properly
connected. Stop
using measuring
CO2 (RM) Comm. RM module failure or
High function of RM
Failed communication failure
module, and notify
biomedical engineer
or manufacturer’s
service staff.

Make sure the gas


CO2 (RM) Occlude The cannula is occluded. High
exhaust works well

Check whether the


CO2 (RM) Check The cannula is off or adapter is properly
Low
Adapter disconnected. connected or replace
the adapter.
Stop measuring
CO2 (RM) Sensor CO module failure function of CO2
2 High
Faulty module, notify
biomedical engineer.
Stop using
CO2 measure value exceeds measuring function
CO2 (RM) Sensor Over the measure range of the High of CO2 module,
Temp
monitor. notify biomedical
engineer.
Disconnect the
sampling cannula or
adapter from the
airway; initiate the
CO2 (RM) Zero Zero calibration failure Low zeroing before
Required
making sure that no
expired air is inside
the sampling cannula
and adapter.

The CO2 concentration


CO2 (RM) Out Of Reduce CO2
exceeds the accuracy range High
Range concentration.
of RM module.

- 55 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken

The sensor may be


Check the sensor
CO2 (RM) Sensor Off disconnected from the Low
connection.
patient or the monitor.

1) The ICG sensor is


disconnected from the Reconnect the ICG
ICG Sensor Off Low
module sensor.
2) Bad connection
The required patient data,
such as height and weight,
ICG Need Input Param Low Input patient data.
has not been input into the
monitor.

The input patient data is Input valid patient


ICG Input Param Error Low
invalid. data.

Make sure the No.1


The No.1 lead on the left is
ICG L1 Lead Off Low lead on the left is
off.
properly connected.

Make sure the No.1


The No.1 lead on the right is
ICG R1 Lead Off Low lead on the right is
off.
properly connected.

Make sure the No.2


ICG L2 or L3 Lead The No.2 or No.3 lead on or No.3 lead on the
Low
Off the left is off. left is properly
connected.
Make sure the No.2
ICG R2 or R3 Lead The No.2 or No.3 lead on or No.3 lead on the
Low
Off the right is off. right is properly
connected.

Make sure the No.4


The No.4 lead on the left is
ICG L4 Lead Off Low lead on the left is
off.
properly connected.

Make sure the No.4


The No.4 lead on the right is
ICG R4 Lead Off Low lead on the right is
off.
properly connected.

- 56 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken


Unplug the module
The communication
and plug it again. If
between the ICG module
ICG Comm. Failed High the problem still
and the monitor fails during
exists, contact your
measuring.
service personnel.

Please change the


Battery Low Battery Low High batteries or charge
the batteries.

Please install the


Recorder Out Of Paper Recorder Out Of Paper Low
paper

The user presses the Notify the


RECORD button when the manufacturer’s
Recorder setup needed Low
monitor is not installed with service staff to install
a recorder. and set the recorder.
Check whether the
network connection
The selected printer is not is in good condition
Printer Unavailable Low
available. and whether the
printer is
malfunctioning.
Delete some data in
Removable device is Less than 10M space is left the removable device
Low
full in the removable device. or use another
removable device.

Repair the removable


Removable dev The removable device is
Low device or replace it
read-only read-only.
with a new one.

- 57 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

5.3 Prompts
Message Cause

The QRS template building required for Arr.


ECG Arr Learning
Analysis is in process.

SpO2 module is analyzing the patient signal and


SpO2 Search Pulse searching for the pulse to compute the saturation,
when sensor is connected with patient.
Manual Measuring In manual measuring mode.
Continual Measuring In continuous measuring mode.
Auto Measuring In automatic measuring mode.
Press the “Start/stop NIBP measurement” button to
Measurem. Canceled
stop the measurement.
Calibrating During calibrating
Calibrat. Canceled Calibration is over.
Leak. Test Running The leakage test is in process.
Leak.Test Canceled Pneumatic test over
Resetting NIBP module in resetting
Please Start NIBP module is in idle status
Done NIBP measurement is completed.
Switch from measuring mode to standby mode,
CO2 Standby
making the module in energy-saving status.
CO2 Sensor Warm Up The CO2 module is in warm-up state.
CO2 Zero Start CO2 module starts zero calibration.
CO2 Zero OK CO2 module completes zero calibration.
No module detected No module is mounted in the monitor.
No module activated No module is activated.
Loading module… The system is loading the inserted module.
IBP transducer is off during zero calibration; or the
IBP Zero Failed
pressure is over the zero calibration range.
IBP Zero OK IBP completes zero calibration.
IBP Calibration Failed IBP transducer is off during calibration.
IBP Calibration OK IBP completes calibration.
AG Self-Testing...... AG module is performing a self-test.

- 58 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

Message Cause
AG Span Calib In Progress Calibration of AG module is in progress.
AG Zero In Progress Zeroing of AG module is in process.
BIS Sensor Check - Not Pass Yet A sensor check is in progress.
Impedance check for the ground electrode is in
BIS Ground Check
progress.
The module has stopped or the BISx device is not
Reconnect BIS Device
connected.
RM Module Purge In Progress A purge operation of the flow sensor is in progress.
RM Module Zero In Progress The zero calibration of RM module is in progress.
Malfunction in zeroing the differential pressure
RM Module Required
transducer or airway pressure transducer
Switch from measuring mode to standby mode,
CO2 (RM) Standby
making the module in energy-saving status.
CO2 (RM) Sensor Warms Up The RM module is in warm-up state.
CO2 (RM) Zero In Progress The zero calibration of RM module is in progress.
Initializing ICG The ICG module is being initialized.
ICG No Measurement Started ICG module is not ready to start measurement.
Printer Busy The monitor is performing a print job.
No Default Printer No default printer has been set.

5.4 Adjustable Range of Alarm Limits


ECG alarm limits are listed as follows: unit (bpm)
Patient Type ALM HI ALM LO
ADU 300 15
HR PED 350 15
NEO 350 15

ST analysis alarm limits are listed as follows: unit (mV)


ALM HI ALM LO
ST 2.0 -2.0

- 59 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

PVCs alarm upper limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
PVCs 10 /

RESP alarm limits are listed as follows: unit (rpm)


Patient Type ALM HI ALM LO
ADU 120 6
RESP PED 150 6
NEO 150 6

SpO2 alarm limits are listed as follows (unit %):


ALM HI ALM LO
SpO2 100 20

PR alarm limits is listed as follows: unit (bpm)


ALM HI ALM LO
PR 300 30

NIBP alarm limits are listed as follows: unit (mmHg)


Patient Type ALM HI ALM LO
ADU SYS 250 60
DIA 190 40
MAP 210 45
PR (NIBP) 240 40
PED SYS 200 60
DIA 150 40
MAP 165 45
PR (NIBP) 240 40
NEO SYS 120 40
DIA 90 20
MAP 100 30
PR (NIBP) 240 40

- 60 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

TEMP alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
T1 50C (122 º F) 0C (32 º F)
T2 50C (122 º F) 0C (32 º F)
TD 50C (90 º F) /

IBP alarm limits are listed as follows: unit (mmHg)


ALM HI ALM LO
Art 300 0
RAP 40 -10
LAP 40 -10
CVP 40 -10
PA 120 -6
ICP 40 -10
P1 300 -50
P2 300 -50

CO2 alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
EtCO2 150 mmHg 0 mmHg
FiCO2 50 mmHg /
AwRR 150 rpm 2 rpm (sidestream)
0 rpm (mainstream)

C.O. alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
TB 43C (109.4℉) 23C(73.4℉)

- 61 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

AG alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
FiCO2 25.0% /
EtCO2 25.0% 0.0%
FiO2 100.0% 18.0%
EtO2 100.0% 0.0%
FiN2O 100.0% 0.0%
EtN2O 100.0% 0.0%
EtDes 18.0% 0%
FiDes 18.0% 0%
EtIso 5.0% 0%
FiIso 5.0% 0%
EtHal 5.0% 0%
FiHal 5.0% 0%
EtSev 8.0% 0%
FiSev 8.0% 0%
EtEnf 5.0% 0%
FiEnf 5.0% 0%
awRR 150 rpm 0 rpm
Apnea Time 40s 20s

BIS alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
BIS 100 0

- 62 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Alarm Information

RM alarm limits are listed as follows:


Patient Type ALM HI ALM LO
ADU 120 rpm 1 rpm
AwRR (RM) PED 120 rpm 2 rpm
NEO 150 rpm 10 rpm
ADU 50 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
PEEP PED 50 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
NEO 50 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
ADU 120 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
PIP PED 120 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
NEO 120 cmH2O 1 cmH2O
ADU 30.0 L/Min 1.0 L/Min
MVe PED 20.0 L/Min 0.3 L/Min
NEO 3.0 L/Min 0.1 L/Min

ICG alarm limits are listed as follows:


ALM HI ALM LO
CI 15.0 L/min/m2 0.0 L/min/m2

- 63 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Managing Patients

Chapter 6 Managing Patients

6.1 Admitting a Patient


The monitor displays physiological data and stores it in the trends as soon as a patient is
connected. This allows you monitor a patient who is not yet admitted. It is however important to
admit patients properly so that you can identify your patient on recordings, reports, and
networked devices.
During admission you enter data that the monitor needs for safe and accurate operation. For
example, the patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and
calculate some measurements, the safety limits that are applied for some measurements, and the
alarm limit ranges.
To admit a patient, please:
1. Select Menu > Patient Setup > New Patient, then a message is displayed to ask the user to
confirm to update patient.
2. Click on No to cancel this operation; click on Yes, the Patient Info window is displayed.
3. Enter the patient information:
 MRN: Enter the patient’s medical record number.
 Last Name: Enter the patient’s last name (family name).
 First Name: Enter the patient’s first name.
 Doctor: Enter the attending doctor for the patient.
 Gender: Male, Female and N/A.
 Type: Choose the patient type, either Adult, Pediat, or Neonat.
 BloodType: N/A, A, B, AB and O.
 Pace: Choose On or Off (You must select On if your patient has a pacemaker).
 Date of Birth: Enter the patient’s date of birth.
 Date of Admission: Enter the patient’s date of admission.
 Height: Enter the patient’s height.
 Weight: Enter the patient’s weight.

- 64 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Managing Patients

6.1.1 Patient Category and Paced Status


The patient category setting determines the algorithm which the monitor uses to process and
calculate some measurements, the safety limits that are applied for some measurements, and the
alarm limit ranges.
The paced setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Pace is
set to Off, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave.

WARNING
1 Changing the patient category may change the arrhythmia and NIBP alarm limits.
Always check alarm limits to make sure that they are appropriate for your patient.
2 For paced patients, you must set Paced to On. If it is incorrectly set to Off, the monitor
could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to give an alarm during asystole.

6.2 Quick Admit


If you do not have the time or information to fully admit a patient, you can use Quick Admit to
quickly admit a patient and complete the rest of the patient information later. To quickly admit a
patient, please:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select Menu > Patient Setup > Quick Admit, then a message is displayed to ask the user to
confirm to update patient.
3. Click on No to cancel this operation; click on Yes to continue and the Quick Admit window
is displayed.
4. Configure Type and Pace to the correct setting and click Yes to finish the quick patient
admission operation. If you want to quit the operation, click No.

6.3 Editing Patient Information


To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, select Menu > Patient Setup >
Patient Info, and make the required changes on the popup interface.

6.4 Updating a Patient


You should always perform an update before starting monitoring for a new patient. When you
select Menu > Patient Setup > Quick Admit, or Menu > Patient Setup > New Patient, a
message of Press ‘Yes’ to create new patient profile by clearing all current patient data... is
displayed.
 If the user selects Yes, the monitor will update the patient information.
 If the user selects No, the monitor won’t update the patient information and returns to
patient setup interface.

- 65 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Managing Patients

NOTE:
Discharging patient will clear the history data in the monitor associated with the patient.

6.5 Central Monitoring System


The monitor can be connected to the central monitoring system. Through the network:
1. The monitor sends patient information, real-time monitoring or measurement data to the
central monitoring system.
2. The real-time monitoring information is displayed on the central monitoring system as the
same to the monitor, and the central monitoring system can perform some bilateral control.
For example: changing patient information, receiving patient, discharging patient and so
forth.
For detailed information, please refer to MFM-CMS Central Monitoring System User Manual and
CMS Central Monitoring System User Manual.
And the monitor supports HL 7 protocol.

NOTE:
1 Use wired instead of wireless networking when connecting the monitor to central
monitoring system in the operating room because the ESU will interfere with a
wireless network, which may cause networking failure.
2 Make sure the network connection between the monitor and the central monitoring
system is in good condition when the time synchronization function on the monitor is
active.
3 The time synchronization function might not be available to all software versions of
MFM-CMS. Consult our technical service department or your local distributor for
more information.

- 66 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual User Interface

Chapter 7 User Interface

7.1 Setting Interface Style


The user can set the interface based on the requirement, and the set options include the following:
 Sweep of the waveform.
 Parameters needing to be monitored.
Change to some settings may have the risk, so only the authorized person can change them. After
changing the settings, please notify the operator.

7.2 Selecting Display Parameters


The user can select the display parameters based on the monitoring and measurement
requirements. To select the parameter, please:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly, or


2. Select Module Switch on the MeasureSet window, or
3. Select Menu > System Setup > Module Switch.
4. Select the required parameters from the popup interface.
5. Exit the menu and the screen will adjust the parameters automatically.

7.3 Changing Waveform Position


The user can exchange the waveform positions of parameter A and parameter B with the
following method:
1. Select waveform A and open the setup menu of waveform A.
2. Select Change from the popup menu and select the desired label name of waveform B from
the pull-down list.

7.4 Changing Interface Layout


Select Menu > Display Setup to open the Display Setup menu on which you can
 Select a function screen based on the clinical requirements by configuring View Selection.
 Select the maximum number of waveforms displayed on the screen by configuring Wave.
Num.
 Decide whether the control bar is displayed or not displayed on the screen by setting
Control Bar to On or Off.

- 67 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual User Interface

7.5 Viewing Trend Screen

To view the trend screen, the user can press the shortcut key on the screen directly or
select Menu > Display Setting > View Selection > TrendScreen.

7.6 Viewing Oxygen Screen

To view the oxygen screen, the user can press the shortcut key on the screen directly or
select Menu > Display Setting > View Selection > oxyCRG. This interface is always used in
NICU because the SpO2, HR and Resp of the neonate are different from those of adults.

7.7 Viewing Large Font Screen


To open the large font screen, please refer to the following steps:

1. Select the shortcut key on the screen directly or.


2. Select Menu > Display Setting > View Selection > Large Font to open this interface.
You can view any available parameter by selecting the parameter from the pull-down list on each
section.

- 68 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual User Interface

7.8 Viewing the Vital Screen

To view the vital screen, the user can press the shortcut key on the screen directly or
select Menu > Display Setup > View Selection > Vital.

7.9 Viewing the Bed View Window


The Bed View window allows you to view one waveform, numeric information of all parameters
and alarm information from another bed on the same network. The monitor enables a maximum
of eight beds to be viewed.
NOTE:
1 The IP addresses of the monitors configured with bed view function should share the
same network segment. The IP addresses of the monitors on the same LAN should
be unique from each other; you cannot use the bed view function in the monitors in
which an IP address conflict exists.
2 In order to use the bed view function without impediment, you need to restart the
monitor after you change its IP address.
3 To use the bed view function smoothly, make sure the network connection is in good
condition.
4 In the Bed View window, you cannot view the over-limit alarms of physiological
parameters occurring on other beds. Besides, arrhythmia alarms and vital alarms will
be indicated only by alarm icons.

7.9.1 Opening the Bed View Window


Before opening the Bed View window, make sure the bed view function is configured on your
monitor. To open the Bed View window, select Menu> Display Setup and choose Bed View in
the View Selection list.

7.9.2 Settings of the Bed View Window


Click on the Bed View window to open the ViewBed Setup menu on which you can
 Assign a bed to be viewed by selecting the bed No. in the Bed No. list.
 Select the waveform to be displayed on the window in the Wave Type list.
 Use the buttons and to view more numeric information of parameters in the
window.

- 69 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual User Interface

7.10 Changing Parameter and Waveform Colors


The user can set the display colors of parameter and waveform as desire. To change the display
color, please select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, enter the required password ABC.
Then select Color Setup to make color changes on parameter and color.

7.11 User Configuration


Users can save the current monitor’s configuration, delete the saved user configuration and
rename it. Three pieces of user configuration can be saved in the monitor.
To save the user configuration:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, enter the required password ABC and then
select User Configure.
2. Click on Save, enter a file name for the configuration and confirm it. A message will display
after the operation.
To delete the user configuration:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, enter the required password ABC and then
select User Configure.
2. Select the configuration file needed to delete from the list, click on Delete and confirm the
operation. A message will display after the operation.
To rename the user configuration:
1. Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, enter the required password ABC and then
select User Configure.
2. Select a configuration file needed to rename from the list and click on Rename.
3. Enter a name for the configuration file and confirm it.

7.12 Default Configuration


To set default configuration, select Menu > Default. On the Default menu, users can choose a
factory configuration (adult, pediatric or neonate) based on the patient category. Also, users can
choose a user configuration saved in the monitor if it is available. For more information about
user configuration, refer to 7.11 User Configuration.

- 70 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

Chapter 8 Monitoring ECG


8.1 Overview
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the
monitor as a waveform and a numeric. This chapter also tells you about arrhythmia monitoring
and ST monitoring.

ECG connector

8.2 ECG Safety Information


WARNING
1 Only use the ECG leads supplied by the manufacturer when using the monitor for
ECG monitoring.
2 When connecting the cables and electrodes, make sure no conductive part is in
contact with the ground. Verify that all ECG electrodes, including neutral electrodes,
are securely attached to the patient but not the conductive part or ground.
3 Check every day whether there is skin irritation resulted from the ECG electrodes. If
yes, replace electrodes every 24 hours or change their sites.
4 Place the electrode carefully and ensure a good contact.
5 Check if the lead connection is correct before monitoring. If you unplug the ECG cable
from the socket, the screen will display the error message “ECG LEAD OFF” and the
audible alarm is activated.
6 When using the monitor with the defibrillator or other high-frequency equipment,
please use defibrillator-proof ECG lead to avoid burn.
7 In order to avoid being burnt, please keep the electrodes far away from the radio knife
while using electrosurgical equipment.

- 71 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

WARNING
8 When using Electrosurgery (ES) equipment, do not place an electrode near the
grounding plate of the Electrosurgery device: otherwise there will be a great deal of
interference with the ECG signal.
9 For patients with pacemakers, the pacing impulse analysis function must be switched
ON. Otherwise, the pacing impulse may be counted as regular QRS complexes,
which could prevent an asystole event from being detected.
10 The electrodes should be made of the same metal materials.
11 ECG cables can be damaged when connected to a patient during defibrillation. Check
cables for functionality before using them again.
12 According to AAMI specifications the peak of the synchronized defibrillator discharge
should be delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R wave. The synchronization
pulse output on the patient monitors is delayed by a maximum of 35 ms from the R
wave peak. Your biomedical engineer should verify that your ECG/Defibrillator
combination does not exceed the recommended maximum delay of 60 ms.
13 Before outputting signals with defibrillator synchronization or ECG, check if the output
is functioning normally.
14 ECG accessories are not suitable for DIRECT CARDIAC APPLICATION. (Refer to
IEC60601-1 for more information about the definition of DIRECT CARDIAC
APPLICATION.)

NOTE:
1 Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and ESU interference
can cause inaccuracy of the waveform.
2 IEC/EN60601-1-2 (protection against radiation is 3v/m) specifies that the electrical
field density exceeding 1v/m may cause measurement error in various frequencies. It
is accordingly suggested that do not use equipment generating electrical radiation
near ECG/RESP monitoring devices.
3 If the pacemaker signals are beyond the claimed range, the heart rate may be
calculated incorrectly.
4 In the default settings of the monitor, the ECG waveforms are the first two waveforms
from top in the waveform area.
5 For measurements in or near the heart we recommend connecting the monitor to the
potential equalization system.
6 For protecting environment, the used electrodes must be recycled or disposed of
properly.

- 72 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

8.3 ECG Display


The figure below is for reference only.

The symbol “①”indicates lead name of display waveform: there are several options, such as Ⅰ,
Ⅱ, Ⅲ, aVR, aVF, aVL, V. If you want to change the lead, please refer to section Selecting
Calculation Lead.
The symbol “②” indicates waveform gain: there are several options, such as X0.125, X0.25,
X0.5, X1, X2, X4 and Auto. If you want to change it, please refer to section Changing the size of
the ECG Wave.
The symbol “③” indicates Filter setting, there are three options: Monitor, Surgery and Diagnos.
If you want to change it, please refer to section Changing the ECG Filter Setting.

8.3.1 Changing the Size of the ECG Wave


If any of the displayed ECG waveform is too small or clipped, you can change the size of it on
the screen. First select ECG Wave Setup > ECG Gain, then select an appropriate factor from
the pop-up box to adjust the ECG waveform.
X0.125 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 1.25mm;
X0.25 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 2.5mm;
X0.5 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 5mm;
X1 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 10mm;
X2 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 20mm;
X4 to make strength of ECG signal waveform of 1mV become 40mm;
Auto let the monitor choose the optimal adjustment factor for all the ECG waves.
NOTE:
The effect of ECG wave gain is subject to the size of the wave area. Whichever wave
gain is chosen, the ECG wave has to be displayed within the wave area.

8.3.2 Changing the ECG Filter Settings


The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. An abbreviation indicating the
filter type is shown underneath the lead label on the monitor display. Filter settings do not affect
ST measurement.

- 73 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

To change the filter setting, in the ECG Setup menu, select Filter and then select the appropriate
setting.
– Monitor: Use this mode under normal measurement conditions.
– Surgery: The filter reduces interference to the signal. It should be used if the signal is
distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually
results in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency
interference usually leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the Filter
reduces artifacts and interference from electro-surgical units. Under normal measurement
conditions, selecting Surgery may suppress the QRS complexes too much and thus interfere with
the clinical evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor.
– Diagnos: Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so
that changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segments are
visible.

8.4 Selecting Calculation Lead


On the Normal interface, the users can select either 3 LEADS or 5 LEADS for this item. Normal
QRS complex should be:
 The normal QRS should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not
be biphasic. For paced patients, the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of
pace pulses.
 The QRS should be tall and narrow.
 The P-waves and the T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV.

8.5 Monitoring Procedure


8.5.1 Preparation
The skin is a poor conductor of electricity; therefore preparation of the patient's skin is important
to facilitate good electrode contact to skin.
 Select sites with intact skin, without impairment of any kind.
 Shave hair from sites, if necessary.
 Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water. (Never use ether or pure alcohol, because this
increases skin impedance).
 Rub the skin briskly to increase capillary blood flow in the tissues and remove skin scurf and
grease.

- 74 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

8.5.2 Connecting ECG Cables


1. Attach clip or snap to electrodes prior to placement.
2. Put the electrodes on the patient. Before attaching, apply some conductive jelly on the
electrodes if the electrodes are not electrolyte self-supplied.
3. Connect the electrode lead to the patient's cable.
4. Plug the patient cable into the ECG connector on XM module.

CAUTION
To protect the monitor from damage during defibrillation, for accurate ECG information
and to protect against noise and other interference, use only ECG electrodes and cables
specified by the manufacturer.

8.5.3 Selecting Lead Type


To change the lead type, please:
1. Select the ECG parameter area, open the ECG Setup menu;
2. Set Lead Type to 3 Leads, 5 Leads or 12 Leads based on the lead used.

8.5.4 Installing Electrodes


NOTE:
The following table gives the corresponding lead names used in Europe and America
respectively. (Lead names are represented by R, L, F, N, C, C1-C6 in Europe, whose
corresponding lead names in America are RA, LA, LL, RL, V, V1-V6.)

AHA (American Standard) IEC (Europe Standard)


Electrode Labels Color Electrode Labels Color
RA White R Red

LA Black L Yellow

LL Red F Green

RL Green N Black

V Brown C White

V1 Brown/ Red C1 White/ Red

V2 Brown/ Yellow C2 White/ Yellow

V3 Brown/ Green C3 White/ Green

V4 Brown/Blue C4 White/ Brown

- 75 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

AHA (American Standard) IEC (Europe Standard)


V5 Brown/Orange C5 White/ Black

V6 Brown/Purple C6 White/ Purple

8.5.4.1 Electrode Placement for 3-lead


Take the American standard for example, see the following figure:
■ RA placement - directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.
■ LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.
■ LL placement - on the left hypogastrium.

Electrode Placement for 3-lead

8.5.4.2 Electrode Placement for 5-lead


Take the American standard for example; see the following figure:
■ RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.
■ LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.
■ RL placement: on the right hypogastrium.
■ LL placement: on the left hypogastrium.
■ V placement: on the chest, the position depends on your required lead selection.

- 76 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

Electrode Placement for 5-lead

NOTE:
To ensure the patient safety, all leads must be attached to the patient.
For 5-lead, attach the V electrode to one of the indicated positions as below:
■ V1 On the 4th intercostal space at the right sterna margin.
■ V2 On the 4th intercostal space at the left sterna margin.
■ V3 Midway between V2 and V4 electrodes.
■ V4 On the 5th intercostal space at the left clavicular line.
■ V5 On the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with V4 electrode.
■ V6 On the left middle axillary line, horizontal with V4 electrode.
■ V3R-V6R On the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left.
■ VE Over the xiphoid position.
■ V7 On the 5th intercostal space at the left posterior axillary line of back.
■ V7R On the 5th intercostal space at the right posterior axillary line of back.

- 77 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

V-Electrode Placement for 5-lead

8.5.4.3 Electrode Placement for 12-lead


Take the American standard for example; the 12-lead electrodes should be placed as follows:
The limb electrodes are placed in the same position as the 3-lead placement.
■ RL placement: on the right hypogastrium.
■ V1: On the 4th intercostal space at the right sterna margin.
■ V2: On the 4th intercostal space at the left sterna margin.
■ V3: Midway between V2 and V4 electrodes.
■ V4: On the 5th intercostal space at the left clavicular line.
■ V5: On the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with V4 electrode.
■ V6: On the left middle axillary line, horizontal with V4 electrode.

- 78 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

Electrode Placement for 12-lead

8.5.4.4 Recommended ECG Lead Placement for Surgical Patients

WARNING
When using Electrosurgery (ES) equipment, leads should be placed in a position in equal
distance from Electrosurgery electrotome and the ES grounding plate to avoid cautery.
Electrosurgery equipment wire and ECG cable must not be tangled up.

Monitoring ECG leads are mainly used for monitoring the patient’s vital signs. When using the
patient monitor with other electrosurgery equipment, it is advised to use the counteracting
defibrillation ECG lead.
The placement of the ECG leads will depend on the type of surgery that is being performed. For
example, in an open chest surgery the electrodes may be placed laterally on the chest or on the
back. In the operating room, artifacts may affect the ECG waveform due to the use of ES
(Electrosurgery) equipment. To help reduce this you can place the electrodes on the right and left
shoulders, the right and left sides near the abdomen, and the chest lead on the left side at
mid-chest. Avoid placing the electrodes on the upper arms. Otherwise the ECG waveform will be
too small.

WARNING
1 When using electrosurgical (ES) equipment, never place ECG electrodes near to the
grounding plate of the ES device, as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG
signal.
2 ECG cables can be damaged when connected to a patient during defibrillation or
using other high frequency equipment. Check cables for functionality before using
them again. It is recommended to use the ECG cables which are defibrillator-proof.

- 79 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

NOTE:
1 If an ECG waveform is not accurate, while the electrodes are tightly attached, try to
change the lead.
2 Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and ESU interference
can cause inaccuracy of the waveform.

8.6 ECG Menu Setup


8.6.1 Setting Alarm Source
To change the alarm source, please select ECG Setup > Alarm Source, then a pop-up box is
displayed:
HR: the monitor considers the HR as HR/PR alarm source;
PR: the monitor considers the PR as HR/PR alarm source;
AUTO: If the Alarm Source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
measurement as the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one
ECG lead can be measured without a technical condition. The monitor will automatically switch
to Pulse as the alarm source if:
–a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured and
–a pulse source is switched on and available.
The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse.
While Pulse is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG
lead becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses HR as alarm source.

8.6.2 Smart Lead Off


When Lead Type is 5 Leads or 12 Leads and Smart LeadOff is set to On, if the selected ECG
waveform cannot be measured because of lead-off or other reasons, it will automatically switch
to another available lead channel via which a waveform can be measured. And the lead name
above the display ECG waveform also automatically turns into the current one.
To change the smart lead off setting, select ECG Setup > Smart LeadOff, and select the desired
setting.

8.6.3 ECG Display


It varies with Lead Type. When Lead Type is set to 3 Leads, Display can be set to Normal, and
it can display one ECG waveform on the main screen.
When Lead Type is set to 5 Leads, Display can be set to Normal, Full-Scr and Half-Scr. Select
Normal to display two ECG waveforms on the main screen; select Full-Scr to display seven
ECG waveforms which occupy the area of seven waveforms on the main screen; Select Half-Scr
to display seven ECG waveforms on the screen, occupying the area of four waveforms.

- 80 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

NOTE:
If 3 Leads is selected in the ECG Setup menu, only Normal can be selected for Display
in the sub-menu.

8.6.4 Setting Pace Status


It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG. To change the
paced status in the ECG Setup menu, select Pace to toggle between On or Off. When Pace is set
to On:
- Pace Pulse Rejection is switched on. This means that pacemaker pulses are not counted as
extra QRS complexes.
|
- Paced symbol is displayed as on the main screen.

NOTE:
1 When monitoring a patient with a pacemaker, set Pace to On. If monitoring a patient
without a pacemaker, set Pace to Off.
2 If Pace is set to On, the system will not perform some types of ARR analysis.

WARNING
Some pace pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted
as a QRS complex, and could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect cardiac arrest
or some arrhythmias. Keep pacemaker patients under close observation.

8.6.5 ECG Calibration


This item is used to calibrate ECG waveform. When you select this item from ECG Setup menu
again, the ECG waveform calibration ends.
NOTE:
The device can’t be monitored during ECG calibration.

8.6.6 ECG Waveform Settings


To change the speed, select ECG Wave Setup > Sweep, then select an appropriate setting from
the pop-up list. The bigger the value is, the wider the waveform is.

8.6.7 12 Leads ECG

8.6.7.1 Activating 12-Lead ECG Monitoring


Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Other Setups > 12 Leads Activate in order to
get the SN number which is supposed to be supplied to the manufacturer for a corresponding

- 81 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

password. Enter the password on the above-mentioned interface and restart the monitor, and the
12-lead ECG monitoring function will be activated.
NOTE:
If the 12-lead ECG monitoring fails to be activated, users can reenter the password and
try to activate this function again.

8.6.7.2 Monitoring Procedure


1 Select and place the 12-lead electrodes as introduced in the above-mentioned section.
2 Select 12 Leads from the pull-down list of Lead Type, and also set Display to 12 Leads.
In 12-lead display mode, 12 ECG waveforms and one rhythm lead waveform will be shown at the
waveform area on the screen. The rhythm lead is for ECG calculation before entering 12-lead
display mode. Also, in this mode, the filter mode is set to Diagnos and can not be changed.

8.7 ST Segment Monitoring


The monitor performs ST segment analysis on normal and atrially paced beats and calculates ST
segment elevations and depressions. This information can be displayed in the form of ST
numerics and snippets on the monitor.
ST segment monitoring function is shut off by default. You can switch it to On when necessary.
When using the ST analysis function, the ST analysis results will be displayed on the right of the
main screen, please refer to the following figure.
NOTE:
1 ST-segment analysis is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically
validated for use with neonatal and pediatric patients.
2 ST analysis is always performed using a dedicated filter which ensures diagnostic
quality. If you are monitoring ECG using an ECG filter mode other than Diagnosis,
the ST segment of the ECG wave may look different from the ST segment of the ST
template for the same wave. For diagnostic evaluation of the ST segment, always set
the filter to Diagnosis or use the ST template.
3 The ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST segment data. The
significance of the ST segment changes need to be determined by a clinician.

8.7.1 Setting ST Analysis


To change ST analysis, please select ECG Setup > ST Analysis, then select On or Off from the
pop-up list.

- 82 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

8.7.2 ST Display
Your monitor screen may be configured to look slightly different from the illustrations.

ST I 0.08 aVR -0.09 V 0.04


II 0.10 aVL 0.03

III 0.02 aVF 0.06

8.7.3 About ST Measurement Points


The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the ISO point and the ST
point, as shown in the diagram below. The isoelectric (ISO) point provides the baseline, and the
ST point is at the midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is where the QRS complex changes its
slope; as it is a fixed distance away from the ST point, it can be useful to help you position the ST
point correctly.

DEF POINT
The ST and ISO measurement points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring, and if the
patient's heart rate or ECG morphology changes significantly. Always ensure that ST
measurement points are appropriate for your patient. Abnormal QRS complex is not considered
in ST segment analysis.

8.7.4 Adjusting ST and ISO Measurement Points


Depending on your monitor’s configuration, the ST point can be positioned, too.
These two points can be adjusted by turning the knob. When adjusting ST measurement point, the
system will show the ST Measurement Point Window. The system displays the QRS complex
template in the window. It is adjustable for the highlight bar in the window. You may select ISO
or ST, switch the knob left or right to move the cursor line. When the cursor is at the required
position, you may select the base point or the measurement point.

- 83 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

8.8 Arr. Monitoring


8.8.1 Arrhythmia Analysis
The arrhythmia algorithm is used to monitor ECG of neonatal, pediatric and adult patients in
clinics, and detect the changes of heart rate and ventricular rhythm, and also save arrhythmia
events and generate alarming information. Arrhythmia algorithm can monitor paced and
non-paced patients. Qualified personnel can use arrhythmia analysis to evaluate patient’s
condition (such as heart rate, PVCs frequency, rhythm and ectopic beat) and decide the treatment.
Besides detecting change of ECG, arrhythmia algorithm can also monitor patients and give
proper alarm for arrhythmia.
The monitor can support up to 16 different arrhythmia analyses.
ARR Types Occurring Condition
ASYSTOLE No QRS is detected for 4 consecutive seconds
Ventricular fibrillation/Ventricular tachycardia: The RR interval of
VFIB/VTAC 4-second fibrillation wave or 5 consecutive ventricular beats is less than 600
ms.
VT>2 3< the number of cluster PVCs < 5
COUPLET 2 consecutive PVCs
BIGEMINY Vent Bigeminy
TRIGEMINY Vent Trigeminy
A type of single PVC under the condition that HR<100,R-R interval is less
R ON T than 1/3 the average interval, followed by a compensating pause of 1.25X
the average R-R interval (the next R wave advances onto the previous T
wave).
PVC Single PVC detected in normal heartbeats.
Adult: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval < 0.5s (HR range:
120bpm to 300bpm).
TACHY
Pediatric/neonatal: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval < 0.375s (HR
range: 160bpm to 350bpm).
Adult: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval ≥ 1.5s (HR range: 15bpm
to 40bpm).
BRADY
Pediatric/neonatal: 5 consecutive QRS complex, RR interval ≥ 1s (HR
range: 15bpm to 60bpm).
When HR is less than 120 beats/min., no heart beat is tested during the
MISSED BEATS period 1.75 times of the average RR interval; or
When HR is ≥ 120 beats/min, no beat is tested within 1 second.
IRR IRREGULAR RHYTHM: The patient has irregular heart rate.
PACE NOT CAPTURE: After the pacemaker is paced, QRS complex can
PNC
not be detected during 300ms.

- 84 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ECG

ARR Types Occurring Condition


PACER NOT PACED: After the QRS complex, no pace is detected during
PNP
1.75 times of RR interval.
VENTRICULAR BRADYCARDIA: The interval of 5 consecutive
VBRADY
ventricular wave is more than 1000 ms.
VENTRICULAR RHYTHM: The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular
VENT
wave ranges from 600 ms to 1000 ms.

8.8.2 ARR Analysis Menu

8.8.2.1 Switching ARR Analysis On and Off


To switch ARR Analysis on or off, in the ECG Setup menu, select ARR Analysis to toggle
between On and Off from the popup interface.

8.8.2.2 PVCs Alarm


Select On in the menu to enable prompt message when an alarm occurs; select Off to disable the

alarm function, and there will be a symbol beside PVCs.

WARNING
When the PVCs Alarm is set to OFF, the monitor won’t give an alarm prompt even if an
alarm occurs. In order to avoid endangering the patient’s life, the user should use this
function cautiously.

8.8.2.3 ARR Relearning


Pick this item to start a learning procedure, and ECG ARR LEARNING is displayed on the
screen. The ECG ARR LEARNING will start automatically in the following status:
 Connecting leads;
 Starting ARR learning manually;
 Switching calculation leads.

8.8.2.4 ARR Alarm


The users can switch on or off all arrhythmia alarms by selecting ECG Setup > ARR Analysis >
ARR Alarm. And some arrhythmia alarms can be individually switched on or off. They are:
ASYSTOLE, VFIB/VTAC, R-ON-T, VT>2, COUPLET, PVC, BIGEMINY, TRIGEMINY,
TACHY, BRADY, MISSED BEATS, IRR, PNC, PNP, VBRADY and VENT, among which
ASYSTOLE and VFIB/VTAC are preset to be on and cannot be turned off.
To switch individual alarm on or off, select ECG Setup > ARR Analysis > ARR Alarm. The
user can set the individual ARR alarm from the popup interface.

- 85 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RESP

Chapter 9 Monitoring RESP

9.1 Overview
The monitor measures respiration from the amount of thoracic impedance between two ECG
electrodes. The change of impedance between the two electrodes, (due to the thoracic movement),
produces a respiratory waveform on the screen.

9.2 RESP Safety Information


WARNING
1 If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection
mode, it may not be possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection
level too low, the monitor is more likely to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely
interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the case of apnea.
2 The respiration measurement does not recognize obstructive and mixed apneas - it
only indicates an alarm when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected
breath.
3 If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated
Immunity 3V/m), field strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at
various frequencies. Therefore it is recommended to avoid the use of electrically
radiating equipment in close proximity to the respiration measurement unit.
4 Cardiogenic artifact in impedance respiration monitoring may make it difficult to detect
breaths or may otherwise be counted as breaths. In some instances, the breath rate
may also correspond to the heart rate making it difficult to determine if the signal is
due to breathing or the cardiac cycle. Do not rely on RESP monitoring as the sole
method for detecting cessation of breathing. Follow hospital guidelines and best
clinical practices for apnea detection including monitoring additional parameters that
indicate the patient’s oxygenation status, such as EtCO2 and SpO2.

NOTE:
The RESP monitoring is not recommended to be used on patients who are very active, as
this can cause false alarms.

9.3 Electrode Placement for Monitoring RESP


Correct patient skin preparation techniques for electrode placement are important for RESP
measurement: you will find this information in the chapter on ECG.
The RESP signal is always measured between two of the ECG electrodes. There are two standard
ECG leads for selection: I lead (RA and LA) and II lead (RA and LL).

- 86 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RESP

Electrodes Placement for 5-lead

9.4 Cardiac Overlay


Cardiac activity that affects the RESP waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the
RESP electrodes pick up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct
electrode placement can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of
the heart in the line between the respiratory electrodes. This is particularly important for
neonates.

9.5 Chest Expansion


Some patients, especially neonates, expand their chests laterally. In these cases it is best to place
the two respiratory electrodes in the right midaxillary and left lateral chest areas at the patient’s
maximum point of breathing movement to optimize the respiratory wave.

9.6 Abdominal Breathing


Some patients with restricted chest movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you
may need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal
expansion to optimize the respiratory wave.
NOTE:
Place the red and green electrodes diagonally to optimize the respiration waveform.
Avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the RESP
electrodes so as to avoid cardiac overlay or artifacts from pulsating blood flow. This is
particularly important for neonates.

9.7 Selecting RESP Lead


To change RESP lead, in the Resp Setup menu, select Resp Lead to pick up the appropriate lead
from the pop-up list.

- 87 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RESP

9.8 Changing Hold Type


To change the calculation mode, in the Resp Setup menu, set Hold Type to Manual or Auto.
When it is set to the AUTO mode, Hold High and Hold Low are unavailable, and the monitor
can calculate the respiration rate automatically. When it is set to the Manual mode, you can
adjust the broken lines in RESP area by the Hold High and Hold Low items.

9.9 Changing the Size and Speed of the Respiration Wave


Select the RESP waveform area to open the Resp Wave Setup menu:
 Select AMP, and choose an appropriate value. The bigger the value is, the higher the
waveform amplitude will be.
 Select Sweep: select an appropriate setting from the pop-up list.

9.10 Changing the Apnea Time


The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The apnea alarm delay time
defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity
and the indication of the apnea alarm.
1. In the Resp Setup menu, select Apnea Alm.
2. Select the appropriate setting from the popup list.

- 88 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

Chapter 10 Monitoring SpO2


10.1 Overview
SpO2 is based on the absorption of pulse blood oxygen to red and infrared light by means of
finger sensor and SpO2 measuring unit. SpO2 Plethysmogram measurement is employed to
determine the oxygen saturation of hemoglobin in the arterial blood. If, for example, 97% of the
hemoglobin molecules in the red blood cells of the arterial blood combine with oxygen, then the
blood has a SpO2 oxygen saturation of 97%. The SpO2 numeric on the monitor will read 97%.
The SpO2 numeric shows the percentage of hemoglobin molecules which have combined with
oxygen molecules to form oxyhemoglobin. The SpO2/PLETH parameter can also provide a pulse
rate signal and a plethysmogram wave.

SpO2 socket

10.2 SpO2 Safety Information


WARNING
1 If the SpO2 sensor can not work properly, please reconnect the sensor or change a
new one.
2 Do not use the sterile supplied SpO2 sensors if the packaging or the sensor is
damaged and return them to the vendor.
3 Prolonged and continuous monitoring may increase the risk of unexpected change of
dermal condition such as abnormal sensitivity, rubescence, vesicle, repressive
putrescence, and so on. It is especially important to check the sensor placement of
neonate and patient of poor perfusion or immature dermogram by light collimation and
proper attaching strictly according to changes of the skin. More frequent examinations
may be required for different patients.

- 89 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

WARNING
4 Tissue damage may be caused by incorrect application or prolonged measurement
duration using the sensor (more than 4 hours). Inspect the sensor periodically
according to the sensor user manual.
5 Only use the sensors and extension cables permitted by the manufacturer with the
oximeter. Other sensors or extension cables may cause improper monitor
performance and/or minor personal injury.
6 High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this
is a consideration do NOT set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to
switching the alarm off.

NOTE:
1 Make sure the nail covers the light window. The wire should be on the backside of the
hand.
2 SpO2 waveform is not proportional to the pulse volume.
3 Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, or intravascular
venous infusion line.
4 Don’t use the functional tester to access the SpO2 accuracy.
5 The device is calibrated to display functional oxygen saturation.
6 The materials with which the patient or any other person can come into contact
conform with the standard of ISO 10993: 2009.

10.3 Measuring SpO2


1. Select the correct patient category setting (adult/pediatric and neonatal), as this is used to
optimize the calculation of the SpO2 and pulse numerics.
2. During measurement, ensure that the application site:
– has a pulsatile flow, ideally with a good circulation perfusion.
– has not changed in its thickness, causing an improper fit of the sensor.

Measurement Procedure
1. Switch on the monitor.
2. Attach the sensor to the appropriate site of the patient finger.
3. Plug the connector of the sensor extension cable into the SpO2 socket on XM module or V-
SpO2 module.

- 90 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

Mounting of the Sensor

WARNING
Inspect the application site every two to three hours to ensure skin quality and correct
optical alignment. If the skin quality changes, move the sensor to another site. Change
the application site at least every four hours.

NOTE:
Injected dyes such as methylene blue or intravascular dyshemoglobins such as
methemoglobin and carboxyhemoglobin may lead to inaccurate measurements.

Interference can be caused by:


 High levels of ambient light or strobe lights or flashing lights (such as fire alarm lamps).
(Hint: cover application site with opaque material.)
 High-frequency electrical noise, including electro-surgical apparatus and defibrillators
 Intravascular dye injections
 Significant concentrations of dysfunctional hemoglobin, such as carboxyhemoglobin and
methemoglobin
 Excessive patient movement and vibration
 Improper sensor application
 Low perfusion or high signal attenuation
 Venous pulsation
 Placement of the sensor on an extremity that has a blood pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or
intravascular line

10.4 Assessing the Validity of a SpO2 Reading


You can check the quality of the pleth wave and the stability of the SpO2 values to assess whether
the sensor functions properly and whether the SpO2 readings are valid. Always use these two
indications simultaneously to assess the validity of a SpO2 reading.
Generally, the quality of the SpO2 pleth wave reflects the quality of the light signals obtained by
the sensor. A wave of poor quality manifests a decline of the signal validity. On the other hand,

- 91 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

the stability of the SpO2 values also reflects the signal quality. Different from varying SpO2
readings caused by physiological factors, unstable SpO2 readings are resulted from the sensor’s
receiving signals with interference. The problems mentioned above may be caused by patient
movement, wrong sensor placement or sensor malfunction. To obtain valid SpO2 readings, try to
limit patient movement, check the placement of the sensor, measure another site or replace the
sensor.

10.5 SpO2 Alarm Delay


There is a delay between a physiological event at the measurement site and the corresponding
alarm at the monitor. This delay has two components:
1. The time between the occurrence of the physiological event and when this event is
represented by the displayed numerical values. This delay depends on the algorithmic
processing time and the sensitivity setting. The lower the sensitivity configured, the longer
the time needed until the numerical values reflect the physiological event.
2. The time between the displayed numerical values exceeding an alarm limit and the alarm
indication on the monitor. This delay is the combination of the configured alarm delay time
plus the general system delay time.

10.6 Signal Intensity (SI)*


* Only applicable to the manufacturer’s SpO2 module.
SI, a numeric value indicating perfusion level, reflects the pulse strength at the monitoring site. It
is indicated by a value ranging from 0 to 10. The bigger the value is, the stronger the signal is.
The signal quality is at a maximum when the value reaches 10. When SI is below 2, it indicates
the weak pulse at the monitoring site; you need to reposition the sensor or find a better site.
The SI value will be displayed on the SpO2 parameter area.

10.7 Setting Pitch Tone


If tone modulation is on, the PR sound lowers when the SpO2 level drops. In the SpO2 Setup
menu, select pitch tone to toggle between On and Off.

- 92 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

10.8 Setting Sensitivity


The different sensitivity indicates different refresh frequency. High indicates the refresh
frequency of SpO2 value is the most frequent. To change the sensitivity, please follow the steps:
1 Select the SpO2 Setup menu;
Select Sensitivity on the interface and select the desired sensitivity from the popup list.

10.9 SatSeconds Alarm Management*


* Only applicable to the Nellcor SpO2 module.

10.9.1 Describing SatSeconds


With traditional alarm management, upper and lower alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen
saturation. During monitoring, as soon as an alarm limit is violated by as little as one percentage
point, an alarm is immediately triggered. When the SpO2 level fluctuates near an alarm limit, the
alarm is triggered each time the limit is violated. Such frequent alarms can be distracting.
With the SatSeconds technique, upper and lower SpO2 alarm limits are set in the same way as
traditional alarm management. However, you can also set a SatSeconds limit that allows
monitoring of SpO2 below the selected lower alarm limit and above the selected upper alarm limit
for a period of time before an alarm is triggered.
The method of calculation is as follows:
The number of percentage points that the SpO2 falls outside the alarm limit is multiplied by the
number of seconds that the SpO2 level remains outside that limit. This can be stated as an
equation:
Points × Seconds = SatSeconds
Where:
Points = SpO2 percentage points outside of the limit
Seconds = number of seconds that SpO2 remains at that point outside of the limit
The alarm response time, assuming a SatSeconds limit set at 50 and a lower alarm limit set at 90,
is described and illustrated below.
In this example, the SpO2 level drops to 88 (2 points below the limit) and remains there for a
period of 2 seconds (2 points × 2 seconds = 4 SatSeconds). The SpO2 then drops to 86 for 3
seconds and then to 84 for 6 seconds. The resulting SatSeconds values are shown below:

SpO2 Seconds SatSeconds


2 × 2 = 4
4 × 3 = 12
6 × 6 = 36

Total SatSeconds = 52

- 93 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring SpO2

After approximately 10.7 seconds, a SatSeconds alarm will be triggered, because the limit of 50
SatSeconds has been exceeded. See arrow (↑) in the following figure.

Alarm Response with SatSeconds

Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than remaining steady for a period of several seconds.
Often, the patient SpO2 may fluctuate above and below the alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm
range several times. During such fluctuation, the monitor integrates the number of SpO2 points,
both positive and negative, until either the SatSeconds limit is reached, or the patient SpO2
returns within a normal range and remains there.

10.9.2 SatSeconds “Safety Net”


The SatSeconds “Safety Net” is for patients whose saturation makes frequent excursions below or
above the SpO2 limit but does not remain in violation long enough for the SatSeconds limit to be
reached. If three or more SpO2 alarm limit violations occur within a 60-second period, an alarm
will be triggered even if the SatSeconds limit has not been reached.

10.9.3 Setting SatSeconds Duration


You can set SatSeconds to Off or to the duration among 10, 25, 50 and 100. To configure the
SatSeconds settings, enter the SpO2 Setup menu and select the desired SatSeconds setting from
the SatSeconds list.

- 94 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring PR

Chapter 11 Monitoring PR
11.1 Overview
The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the
heart in beats per minute (bpm). You can display a pulse from any measured SpO2 signal or any
arterial pressure.

11.2 Setting PR Source


The monitor provides PR source options. You can select SpO2 or arterial pressure labels as the
PR source in the PR Source list on the PR Setup menu.
NOTE:
In the PR Source list, an arterial pressure label accompanied with a label with brackets
indicates this label is in conflict. Do not select a conflicting label as the PR source.

11.3 Setting PR Volume


Select PR Setup > PR Volume, then select the appropriate setting for the PR volume: five bars
represent the maximum volume and one bar represents the minimum volume. If none of bars are
selected, the PR volume will be off.

11.4 Selecting the Active Alarm Source


In most cases, the HR and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on
HR and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm source. To change the
alarm source, select Alarm Source in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, then select
 HR: if you want HR to be the alarm source for HR/Pulse.
 PR: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm
your choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse as the alarm source, ECG HR alarms are
switched off.
 AUTO: If the Alarm Source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
measurement as the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least
one ECG lead can be measured without an technical alarm condition. The monitor will
automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source.
NOTE:
Pulse alarms are only generated when the active alarm source is set to PR, a pulse
source is set as system pulse and pulse alarms are switched on.

- 95 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

Chapter 12 Monitoring NIBP


12.1 Overview
This monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring NIBP. It can be used for adult,
pediatric and neonatal patients.
Oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the occluding cuff as the cuff
deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse breaks
through the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase
in amplitude, reach a maximum (which approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish.
The blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the American National
Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI/ISO 81060-2:2009) in
relation to mean error and standard deviation.

NIBP start/ stop key

Connector for NIBP cuff

12.2 NIBP Safety Information


WARNING
1 Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin
damage has occurred or is expected, such as on the arm on the side of a
mastectomy.
2 Use clinical judgment to decide whether to perform frequent unattended blood
pressure measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of
the risk of hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.
3 Ensure that the correct setting is selected when performing measurements. It may be
dangerous for the children to use an over pressure level.
4 The equipment is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery.

- 96 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

WARNING
5 Before starting a measurement, verify that you have selected a setting appropriate for
your patient (adult, child or neonate.)
6 Do not apply the cuff to a limb that has an intravenous infusion or catheter in place.
This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when infusion is slowed or
blocked during cuff inflation.
7 Make sure that the air conduit connecting the blood pressure cuff and the monitor is
neither blocked nor tangled.
8 Do not attach the cuff to a limb being used for IV infusions as the cuff inflation can
block the infusion, potentially causing harm to patient.

NOTE:
1 It is suggested that the user should not start NIBP measuring when the low battery
displays, or the monitor may be turned off automatically.
2 If you spill liquid onto the equipment or accessories, particularly if there is a chance
that it can get inside the tubing or the measurement device, contact your service
personnel.
3 Continuous use of the automatic measuring mode for short intervals may lead to the
discomfort of patient.

12.3 Measurement Limitations


Measurements are impossible with pulse rate extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 240
bpm, or if the patient is on a heart-lung machine.
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible in the following situations:
 A regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect.
 Patients with cardiac arrhythmias.
 Patients with excessive and continuous movement such as shivering or convulsions.
 Patients with rapid blood pressure changes.
 Patients with severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries.
 Patients with obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations
coming from the artery.
 Patients on an edematous extremity.

- 97 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

12.4 Measurement Methods


There are three methods of measuring NIBP:
 Manual - measurement on demand.
 Auto - continually repeated measurements (between 1 and 480 minute adjustable interval).
 Sequence - the measurement will run consecutively in five minutes, then the monitor enters
manual mode.

WARNING
Prolonged non-invasive blood pressure measurements in Auto mode may be associated
with purport, ischemia and neuropathy in the limb wearing the cuff. When monitoring a
patient, examine the extremities of the limb frequently for normal color, warmth and
sensitivity. If any abnormality is observed, stop the blood pressure measurements.

12.5 Measurement Procedures


To obtain accurate measurements, the following operating steps need to be observed:
1. Ensure the patient position in normal use, including
 Comfortably seated
 Legs uncrossed
 Feet flat on the floor
 Back and arm supported
 Middle of the cuff at the level of the right atrium of the heart
2. Make sure the patient relaxes as much as possible and does not talk during the measurement.
3. Five minutes should elapse before the first reading is taken.
NOTE:
If a NIBP measurement is suspected, repeat the measurement. If you are still uncertain
about the reading, use another method to measure the blood pressure.

To start the measurement:


1. Connect the air hose to the connector on XM module and switch on the monitor.
2. Apply the blood pressure cuff to the patient's arm or leg and follow the instructions below.
Ensure that the cuff is completely deflated.
Apply the appropriate size cuff to the patient (About the cuff size selection, please refer to
Section NIBP accessories), and make sure that the symbol "Φ" is over the artery. Ensure that
the cuff is not wrapped too tightly around the limb. Excessive tightness may cause
discoloration and eventual ischemia of the extremity.

- 98 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

NOTE:
The width of the cuff is either approximately 40% of the limb circumference or 2/3 of the
upper arm length. The inflatable part of the cuff should be long enough to encircle
80-100% of the limb. The wrong size of cuff can cause erroneous readings. If the cuff
size is in question, use another cuff with suitable size to avoid errors.

Cuff Usage
3. Connect the cuff to the air tubing.
4. Check whether the patient mode is appropriately selected. Access the Patient Setup menu
from Menu. Turn the knob to select the required patient Type in the Patient Info. menu.
5. Select a measurement mode in the NIBP Setup menu. Refer to section Operation Prompts
for details.

6. Press the button on the front panel to start a measurement.


NOTE:
1 Please make sure the cuff is well connected. A leak of air may cause measurement
error.
2 Please select the cuff with the suitable size. An unsuitable cuff may cause incorrect
measurements.
3 Do not disinfect the cuff with radiation or gas, or the cuff will be deteriorated.
4 Avoid incursion of liquid into the cuff. If this happens, please desiccate the cuff
completely.

12.5.1 Operation Prompts


1. Manual Measuring
Access the NIBP Setup menu and set the Measure Mode item to Manual. Then press the
button on the front panel to start a manual measurement.

- 99 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

2. Automatical Measurement

Access the NIBP Setup menu and set the Measure Mode item to Auto, then press the
button on the front panel to start the automatical measurement according to the selected time
interval.

During the idle period of measurement process, press the button on the front panel at
any time to start a manual measurement. Then press the button on the front panel to stop
manual measurement and the system continues to execute auto measurement program according
to the selected time interval.
3. Continuous measurement
Access the NIBP Setup menu and pick the Continual item to start a continuous measurement.
The continuous measurement will last 5 minutes.
4. Stopping continuous measurement

During continuous measurement, press the button on the front panel at any time to stop
continuous measurement.

12.5.2 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level


To correct the measurement if the limb is not at heart level to the displayed value:
Add 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each centimeter Deduct 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each
higher or centimeter lower or
Add 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch higher Deduct 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch
lower

12.6 NIBP Multi-Review Window


To set the display of NIBP measurements, select NIBP Setup > Review:
 When it is set to On, a window for NIBP measurements will be displayed at the waveform
area on the main interface, and the size of this window varies depending on the numbers of
displayed waveforms.
 When it is set to Off, the window is unavailable on the screen.

12.7 Resetting NIBP


When the pressure does not work properly and the system fails to give a message for the problem,
pick Reset in the User Maintain > NIBP Maintain menu to activate self-test procedure, and
thus restore the system from abnormal performance.

- 100 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

12.8 Calibrating NIBP


NIBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure transducers must be verified and calibrated, if
necessary, at least once every two years by a qualified service professional. See the Service
Manual for details.

12.9 Leakage Test


WARNING
This leakage test other than being specified in the EN 1060-1 standard is to be used by
the user to simply determine whether there are air leaks in the NIBP airway. If at the end
of the test the system gives the prompt that the NIBP airway has air leaks, please contact
the manufacturer for repair.

Procedure of Leakage Test


1. Connect the cuff securely with the socket for NIBP air hole.
2. Wrap the cuff around the cylinder of an appropriate size.
3. Make sure the patient type has been set to Adult.
4. Access User Maintain > NIBP Maintain.
5. Select Leakage Test. Then the prompt Leak. Test Running will appear indicating that the
system has started the leakage test.
6. The system will automatically inflate the pneumatic system to about 180 mmHg.
7. After 20 seconds, the system will automatically open the deflating valve, which marks the
completion of a pneumatic measurement.
8. If the alarm information NIBP Leak appears, it indicates that the airway may have air leaks.
In this case, the user should check for loose connection. After confirming secure connections,
the user should re-perform the leakage test. If the failure prompt still appears, please contact
the manufacturer for repair.

Diagram of NIBP Air Leakage Test

- 101 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring NIBP

12.10 Setting Inflation Mode


To change the inflation mode:
1. Select NIBP Setup > Inflation Mode;
2. Choose Manual or AUTO from the pull-down list.
 If Manual is chosen, the preset value by users will be adopted as the inflation value when
measuring blood pressure.
 If AUTO is chosen, the default value will be adopted as the inflation value when
measuring blood pressure.

- 102 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring TEMP

Chapter 13 Monitoring TEMP


13.1 Overview
Body temperature is measured by means of a thermistor probe (a semiconductor whose resistance
changes with temperature) that is applied to the skin or to the rectum.
Two TEMP probes can be used simultaneously to measure two TEMP values, and get the
temperature difference. The standard configuration is skin probe for adult.

Connector for TEMP probe 1

Connector for TEMP probe 2

13.2 TEMP Safety Information


WARNING
1 Verify probe cables fault detection before the beginning of monitoring phase. Unplug
the temperature probe cable of the channe1 from the socket, and then the screen will
display the error message TEMP T1 Sensor Off and the audible alarm is activated. It
is the same to the other channel.
2 Take the TEMP probe and cable carefully. When they are not in use, you should coil
up the probe and cable into a loose circle. If the wire inside the cable is tensely pulled,
it may cause mechanical damage to the probe and the cable.

13.3 TEMP Monitoring Setup


 With a reusable TEMP probe you can plug the probe directly into the TEMP connector on
XM module.
 Apply the TEMP probes securely to the patient.
 Switch on the monitor
It takes 5 minutes for the temperature measurement to stabilize.

- 103 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring TEMP

13.4 Calculating Temp Difference


The monitor can calculate and display the difference between two temperature values by
subtracting the second value from the first. The difference is labeled TD.

- 104 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring IBP

Chapter 14 Monitoring IBP


14.1 Overview
IBP is measured by means of a catheter inserted directly into the circulatory system. A pressure
transducer connected to the catheter converts the mechanical force exerted by the blood into an
electrical signal, which is displayed graphically as pressure versus time on a monitor screen or
numerically on digital display.
The monitor measures direct blood pressure of one selected blood vessel through a maximum of
eight channels, and displays waveforms and pressure of measured direct blood pressure (SYS,
DIA and MAP).

Zero key for IBP

IBP connector

14.2 IBP Safety Information


WARNING
1 The operator should avoid contact with the conductive parts of the appurtenance
when it is connected or applied.
2 When the monitor is used with HF surgical equipment, the transducer and the cables
must be avoided from conductive connection to the HF equipment. This is to protect
against burns to the patient.
3 Disposable IBP transducer or domes should not be reused.
4 If any kind of liquid, other than solution to be infused in pressure line or transducer, is
splashed on the equipment or its accessories, or enters the transducer or the monitor,
contact the Hospital Service Center immediately.

- 105 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring IBP

NOTE:
1 Use only the pressure transducer listed in the IBP Accessories
2 Calibrate the instrument as frequently as dictated by your Hospital Procedures Policy.

14.3 Monitoring Procedures


Preparatory steps for IBP measurement:
1. Plug the pressure cable into the IBP socket on XM module or V-IBP module and switch on
the monitor.
2. Flushing through the system with normal saline solution. Ensure that the system is free of air
bubbles.
3. Connect the patient catheter to the pressure line, making sure that there is no air present in
the catheter or pressure line.
4. Position the transducer so that it is at the same level with the patient’s heart, approximately
mid-axillary line.
5. For the label name selection, please refer to Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring.
6. To zero the transducer, please refer to Zeroing the Pressure Transducer.

WARNING
If there are air bubbles in the pressure line or the transducer, you should flush the system
with the solution to be infused.

14.3.1 Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring


Tell the monitor which pressure you want to monitor by selecting its pressure label. The label is a
unique identifier for each type of pressure. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that label’s
stored settings, for example color, wave scale and alarm settings. The label also determines which
algorithm is used to process the pressure signal, so an incorrect label can lead to incorrect
pressure values. To select the label, please refer to the following table:

Label Description
ART Arterial blood pressure
PA Pulmonary artery pressure
CVP Central venous pressure
ICP Intracranial pressure
LAP Left atrial pressure
RAP Right atrial pressure
P1-P2 Alternative non-specific pressure labels

- 106 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring IBP

14.3.2 Zeroing the Pressure Transducer


To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in
accordance with your hospital policy (at least once per day). You must perform a zero:
 When you use a new transducer or tubing
 Every time you reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor;
 If you think the monitor’s pressure readings are not correct.
When using a pressure module, the zero information is stored in the module.

14.3.3 Zeroing a Pressure Measurement


The zeroing procedure is listed as below:
1. Turn off the stopcock to the patient.
2. Vent the transducer to atmospheric pressure, to compensate for the static and atmospheric
pressure exerted on the transducer.
3. In the setup menu for the pressure, select Zero.
4. When you see the message Zero Ok, please close the stopcock to atmospheric pressure, and
open the stopcock to the patient.

14.3.4 Troubleshooting the Pressure Zeroing (Taking Art for Example)


The status message lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful calibration.
Cause Corrective Action
Art ZERO FAIL Make sure that the transducer is not attached to the patient
Art SENSOR OFF, FAIL Make sure that transducer is not off, and then proceed
zeroing
IN DEMO, FAIL Make sure that the monitor is not in DEMO mode. Contact
service technician if necessary
PRESSURE OVER RANGE, Make sure that the stopcock is vented to atmosphere. If the
FAIL problem persists, please contact service technician
PULSATILE PRESSURE Make sure that the transducer is vented to air, not connected
ZERO FAIL to a patient, and try again.

14.3.5 IBP Pressure Calibration


IBP is not user-calibrated. Mercury calibration should be performed by a qualified service
professional as frequently as dictated by your Hospital Procedures Policy.

- 107 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring IBP

14.4 Changing the IBP Waveform Ruler


The top, middle and bottom rulers are available for each channel of IBP waveform. Users can
adjust the top, middle or bottom rulers manually:
1. Open the menu Wave Setup of IBP by clicking on the IBP waveform area.
2. Select a suitable ruler from the options TopRuler, MidRuler and BotRuler.

- 108 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

Chapter 15 Monitoring CO2


15.1 Overview
The monitor provides the sidestream and mainstream methods for CO2 monitoring.
The principle of CO2 measurement is primarily based on the fact that CO2 molecule can absorb
4.3μm infrared ray. Absorption intensity is proportional to CO2 concentration of patient sample,
the CO2 concentration will compute according to the detecting CO2 absorption intensity of patient
sample.
 Sidestream measurement takes a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample flow
from the patient’s airway and analyzes it with a CO2 sensor. You can measure sidestream
CO2 using the monitor’s built-in CO2 measurement.
 Mainstream measurement uses a CO2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted
into the patient’s breathing system.

Identifying CO2 Modules


Sidestream CO2 modules (From left to right are the Respironics CO2 module and the
manufacturer’s CO2 module):

Gas outlet
Gas inlet

Water trap
Gas outlet holder

Mainstream CO2 module:

Connector for CO2 transducer

- 109 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

15.2 CO2 Safety Information


WARNING
1 Do not use the device in the environment with flammable anesthetic gas.
2 The device should be used by trained and qualified medical personnel authorized by
the manufacturer.
3 Nitrous oxide, elevated levels of oxygen, helium, xenon, halogenated hydrocarbons,
and barometric pressure can influence the CO2 measurement.
4 The monitor will be damaged if any pipeline from the CO2 module is disconnected, or
the air tube /the air inlet /the air outlet is plugged by water or other materials.
5 The accuracy of the CO2 measurement will be affected by the following reasons: the
airway was highly obstructed; the leakage of air way connection or quick variation of
environment temperature.
6 Follow precautions for electrostatic discharge (ESD) and electromagnetic interference
(EMI) to and from other equipment.
7 In the presence of electromagnetic devices (i.e., electrocautery), patient monitoring
may be interrupted due to electromagnetic interference. Electromagnetic fields up to
20V/m will not adversely affect module performance.
8 Do not place the sensor cables or tubing in any manner that may cause entanglement
or strangulation.

NOTE:
After the low battery alarm appears, please do not start the CO2 measurement, or the
monitor may turn off for the low capacity of battery.

15.3 Monitoring Procedures


15.3.1 Zeroing the sensor
You must perform zeroing following the steps when using the new airway adapter.
1. Expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO2 including the
ventilator, the patient’s breath and the operator’s.
2. In the CO2 Setup menu, set the Work Mode to Measure.
3. Select Zero Calibration in the CO2 Setup menu.
4. After the zeroing calibration is completed, you can start CO2 monitoring. If the system
displays Breath Detected or Zero Required, zeroing has failed. Zero calibration must be
performed again.

- 110 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

15.3.2 Sidestream CO2 Module

15.3.2.1 Measurement Steps

For the manufacturer’s Sidestream CO2 Module:


1. Fix the water trap to the water trap holder in the V-CO2 module (the manufacturer’s CO2
module).
2. Connect the sampling cannula or the sampling line to the water trap.
3. Set Work Mode to Measure.
4. For intubated patients, an airway adapter is required. For non-intubated patients, place the
nasal cannula or the sampling mask onto the patient.
NOTE:
Disconnect the water trap from the holder or set Work Mode to Standby when the
module is not in use.

For the Respironics Sidestream CO2 Module:


1. Plug the sensor cable into the CO2 input connector on the sidestream CO2 module. Allow the
sensor two minutes for warm-up.
2. Connect the cannula, airway adapter, or sample line as required to the sensor. It will click
into place when seated correctly.
3. To zero the sensor, please refer to zeroing the sensor.
4. For intubated patients, an airway adapter is required;

Air adapter

- 111 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal cannula onto the patient.

Place the nasal cannula


NOTE:
1 You must perform a zero calibration as described in this procedure each time the
ambient temperature changes more than 10°C (for example during transport).
2 Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor before inserting the airway adapter
into the breathing circuit. In reverse, always remove the airway adapter from the
breathing circuit before removing the sensor.
3 Disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or sample line from the sensor when they
are not in use.

15.3.2.2 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System


WARNING
Anesthetics: When using the sidestream CO2 measurement on patients who are
receiving or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging
system, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the sidestream
sensor at the outlet connector.

15.3.3 Mainstream CO2 Module


NOTE:
You must perform a zero calibration as described in this procedure each time you use a
new airway adapter.

15.3.3.1 Measurement Steps


1 Attach the sensor connector to the CO2 connector on the mainstream CO2 module.
2 Wait two minutes, allowing the sensor to reach its operating temperature and a stable
thermal condition.

- 112 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

3 Choose the appropriate airway adapter and connect it to the sensor head. The airway adapter
clicks into place when seated correctly.

Connecting Sensor
4 To zero the sensor, please refer to zeroing the sensor;
5 Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the
ventilator Y-section.

Connecting Airway Adapter

WARNING
1 No routine user calibration required.
2 Accuracy is affected by temperature and barometric pressure.

NOTE:
1 Replace the airway adapter, if excessive moisture or secretions are observed in the
tubing or if the CO2 waveform changes unexpectedly without a change in patient
status.

- 113 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

2 To avoid infection, use only disinfected or disposable airway adapters.


3 Inspect the airway adapters prior to use. Do not use it if airway adapter appears
damaged or broken. Observe airway adapter color coding for patient population.
4 Periodically check the flow sensor and tubing for excessive moisture or secretion
buildup.

15.3.3.2 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System


WARNING
Anesthetics: when using the mainstream CO2 measurement on patients who are
receiving or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging
system, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the
mainstream sensor at the outlet connector.

15.4 Setting CO2 Corrections


Temperature, water vapor in the patient’s breath, barometric pressure, and the proportions of O2,
N2O and Helium in the mixture all influence CO2 absorption. If values seem inaccurately high or
low, check that the monitor is using the appropriate corrections.
For the manufacturer’s sidestream module, the following items are available in the CO2 Other
Setup menu: N2O Compen., O2 Compens., Anest. Agent, Vapor Compen. and Pump Rate.
For the Respironics CO2 modules, there are Baro Press, O2 Compens, Anes Agent and Balance
Gas in the CO2 Other Setup menu.

15.5 Changing Apnea Alarm


This determines the time limit after which the monitor gives an alarm if the patient stops
breathing.
1. Select the CO2 Setup menu to open it;
2. Select Apnea Alm from the menu;
3. Choose the apnea alarm time from the pop-up list.

WARNING
Safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of
apnea, particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been
established.

- 114 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring CO2

15.6 Setting CO2 Waveform


Open the menu CO2 Wave Setup by clicking on the CO2 waveform area:
 Choose Mode and set it to Curve or Filled from the pop-up list;
 Choose Sweep and select a suitable setting from the pop-up list. The bigger the value is, the
wider the waveform will be.

- 115 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

Chapter 16 Monitoring C.O.


16.1 Overview
The Cardiac Output (C.O.) measurement is performed by using Thermodilution method. The
monitor can determine blood temperature, measure cardiac output, and perform hemodynamic
calculations. You can have iced injecta using either the flow through system or individual
syringes of injecta. You can perform up to 6 measurements before editing the average Cardiac
Output. The prompt message on the screen will tell you when to inject.

C.O. start key

Connector for C.O. cable

16.2 C.O. Safety Information


WARNING
1 Make sure that appurtenance applied is in conformity with relevant Medical Device
Safety Requirements.
2 Appurtenance should be avoided from contact with conductive metal body when
being connected or applied.

NOTE:
To replace the catheter thermistor, please enter the catheter computation coefficient into
the Constant item according to the instruction.

16.3 C.O. Monitoring Procedures


1. Plug the C.O. cable into the C.O. socket on V-C.O. module and turn on the monitor.
2. Attach the injectate probe connector and catheter thermistor connector to the appropriate parts
of the cardiac output interface cable. And open the patient information window to confirm the
patient’s height and weight.

- 116 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

3. Pick the CO Measure item in the CO Option menu.


4. You can perform more than one measurement as required.
5. After the completion of the measurement, access the CO Measure window for Review to edit
the measured data.

1: Monitor; 2: Thermodilution Catheter; 3: Cardiac Output Cable; 4: Injectate Sensor Housing; 5:


Injectate; 6: Delivery System; 7: In-line injectate Temperature probe.
C.O. Sensor Connection

WARNING
Make sure that the computational constant for the measurement is appropriate to the
catheter used.

NOTE:
The blood temperature alarm will not function during C.O. measurement. It will resume
automatically when the measurement is over.

- 117 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

16.4 C.O. Measurement Window


Select the CO Option menu to enter the CO Measure window and start C.O. measurement. If
C.O. transducer is not connected, the monitor will display No Sensor on the screen.
NOTE:
Before a C.O. measurement is initiated, check the accuracy of patient setup. The
calculation of C.O. is related to the patient height and weight; therefore, incorrect input
will lead to error in calculation.





C.O. Measure Window

① Measurement curve
② Prompt message area
③ Cardiac Output
④ Cardiac Index
⑤ Body Surface Area
⑥ Blood Temperature
⑦ Injectate Temperature
⑧ Start time of the measurement
⑨ Function keys

- 118 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

The functional keys on the CO measure window are explained in the following table:
Start Start a measurement
Stop If the blood temperature cannot resume in a considerably
long time, the measurement could not stop automatically.
Use this button to stop the measurement and display the
C.O., CI calculation result.
Cancel Cancel the processing measurement or cancel the result
after measurement.
Record Print out the curve.
Y axis Change the scale Y (temperature) value. Three modes are
available: 0C to 0.5C, 0C to 1C, 0C to 2.0C. Adjust
the scale by the temperature differences. A smaller scale
results in a larger curve.
X axis Change the Scale X (time) value. Two modes are available:
0s to 30s, 0s to 60s. If you start measurement in the 0s to
30s mode, it will be switched to 0s to 60s mode
automatically if the measurement can not finish within 30
seconds. After the switch, no further adjustment can be
made to the Scale X.
Review Enter the Review window

16.5 Measurement Process


Measurement should be taken when the message “Ready for new measurement” appears on the
screen. Press the Start button, and then start injection. The thermodilution curve, current blood
temperature and the injectate temperature are displayed during the measurement. Curve drawing
will stop automatically when the measurement finishes, and the C.O. and CI (③ and ④ in the
above figure) will be calculated and displayed on the screen. The monitor will display C.O. in the
parameter area and the start measurement time (⑧ in the above figure).
To ensure the accuracy of the measurement, it is suggested that a reasonable interval should take
place between two consecutive measurements. The length of the interval can be set in the C.O.
Setup menu (Time unit: second). The interval time counter is displayed on the screen. The next
measurement can not be performed until the time reduces to zero and a message Ready for new
measurement appears.
NOTE:
1 It is strongly recommended that the user must push the injector within four seconds
after pressing the Start button.
2 It is strongly recommended that you wait at least 1 minute (or longer depending on the
patient’s clinical condition) before starting the next measurement.
Repeat this procedure until you have completed the measurements you want.

- 119 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

You can perform a maximum of six measurement editing. If you perform additional
measurements the earliest measurement each time will be deleted. If any of the curves in the
editing window is not selected for calculation (excluded from the averaging calculations), the
place will be taken by the new measurement.

16.6 Editing C.O.


Pick the Review button on the CO Measure menu to access the Review as shown below:

② ③

Window For C.O. Edit


 Contents displayed in the window:
① Six curves of the six measurements and C.O. value
② Average value of C.O.

③ Average value of CI

Values of selected measurements can be averaged and stored in the C.O. item in the HEMOD
menu as the basis for Hemodynamic calculations.

16.7 Blood Temperature Monitoring


Blood temperature monitoring can function when C.O. measurement is not taken. The blood
temperature is measured by the thermistor situated in the distal end of the flotation catheter in the
pulmonary artery.
The blood temperature alarm function will not work during the C.O. measurement. When the
measurement ends, the function will automatically resume.
The current blood temperature is displayed in the C.O. parameter area.

- 120 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring C.O.

Right ventricle

Thermodilution Catheter Site

16.8 Setting the Computation Constant


The computation constant is associated with catheter and injectate volume. When the catheter is
changed, please adjust Constant in the CO Setup menu based on product description provided
by the manufacturer.

16.9 Recording C.O. Measurements


C.O. measurement can be recorded by the recorder. To record the C.O. measurement, please
select Record in the CO Measure menu.

16.10 Setting INJ. TEMP Source


To change the INJ Temp Source:
1 Select Inj Temp Source in the CO Setup menu;
2 Select Auto or Manual from the list;
 Manual: directly displaying the injectate temperature from INJ. TEMP.
 Auto: indicating the system obtains the injectate temperature through sampling.

16.11 Setting the Interval


You can set the minimum interval between two measurements in sequence by selecting CO
Option >CO Setup >Interval and configuring Interval to a certain value by the second. No C.O.
measurement can be taken during the interval.
The adjustable range of Interval is: 5 to 300 seconds.

- 121 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

Chapter 17 Monitoring AG
17.1 Overview
The monitor uses ISA sidestreasm gas analyzer (hereinafter called ISA analyzer) and IRMA
mainstream module (hereinafter called IRMA module) to monitor the anesthetic gas which can be
used to measure the gases of adult, pediatric and neonatal patients during anesthesia, recovery
and respiratory care. And the anesthetic gas includes Halothane (HAL), Isoflurane (ISO),
Enflurane (ENF), Sevoflurane (SEV), Desflurane (DES), CO2 and N2O.

Identifying AG Module
From left to right are: sidestream AG module and mainstream AG module.

Gas inlet

Gas outlet Connector for


AG transducer

17.2 Safety Information


17.2.1 Safety Information for ISA Analyzer
WARNING
1 The ISA sidestream gas analyzer is intended for use by authorized healthcare
professionals only.
2 Use only Nomoline sampling lines manufactured by PHASEIN.
3 The ISA analyzer must not be used with flammable anesthetic agents.
4 Carefully route the sampling line to reduce the risk of patient entanglement or
strangulation.
5 Do not re-use disposable single-patient use Nomoline Family sampling lines due to
the risk of cross contamination.
6 Do not lift the monitor by the sampling line as it could disconnect from the monitor,
causing the monitor to fall on the patient.

- 122 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

WARNING
7 Dispose Nomoline Family sampling lines in accordance with local regulations for
biohazardous waste; otherwise, it may cause environmental contamination.
8 Use only airway T-adapters with the sampling point in the center of the adapter.
9 Do only use sample lines intended for anesthetic agents if N2O and/or anesthetic
agents are being used.
10 Do not use T-adapter with infants, as this adds 7 ml dead space to the patient circuit.
11 Do not use adult/pediatric type sampling line configurations with infants, as this may
add dead space to the patient circuit.
12 Do not use infant type sampling line configurations with adults, as this may cause
excessive flow resistance.
13 Do not use the ISA analyzer with metered-dose inhalers or nebulized medications as
this may clog the bacteria filter.
14 Check that the gas sample flow is not too high for the present patient category.
15 Since a successful zeroing requires the presence of ambient air (21% O2 and 0%
CO2), ensure that the ISA is placed in a well ventilated place. Avoid breathing near the
ISA sidestream gas analyzer before or during the zeroing procedure.
16 The Nomoline sampling line and its interfaces are non-sterile devices. To avoid
damage, do not autoclave any part of the sampling line.
17 Measurements can be affected by mobile and portable RF communications
equipment. Make sure that the ISA sidestream gas analyzer is used in the
electromagnetic environment specified in this manual.
18 ISA sidestream gas analyzer is intended only as an adjunct in patient assessment. It
must be used in conjunction with other assessments of clinical signs and symptoms.
19 Replace the sampling line if the sampling line input connector starts flashing red, or a
“Sample line clogged” message is displayed on the host.
20 No modification of this equipment is allowed without authorization of the manufacturer.
If this equipment is modified, appropriate inspection and testing must be conducted to
ensure continued safe operation.
21 ISA analyzers are not designed for MRI environments.
22 Use of high frequency electrosurgical equipment in the vicinity of the monitor may
produce interference and cause incorrect measurements.
23 Use of high frequency electrosurgical equipment may enhance the risk of being
burned; therefore, a static-free or conductive respiratory cannula is not
recommended.
24 Do not use external ambient cooling of the ISA device.

- 123 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

WARNING
25 Do not apply negative pressure to remove condensed water from the Nomoline
Family sampling line.
26 Too strong positive or negative pressure in the patient circuit might affect the sample
flow.
27 Strong scavenging suction pressure might affect the sample flow.
28 Exhaust gases should be returned to the patient circuit or a scavenging system.
29 Due to the risk of patient cross-infection, always use a bacteria filter on the exhaust
port side if sampled gas is intended to be re-breathed.
30 Do not place the ISA gas analyzer in any position that might cause it to fall on the
patient.
31 Do not immerse Nomoline Family sampling lines in liquid.
32 Do not operate the ISA sidestream gas analyzer if the enclosure is damaged.

CAUTION
1 The ISA analyzers should be securely mounted in order to avoid the risk of damage to
the ISA.
2 Do not apply tension to the ISA analyzer cable.
3 Do not operate the ISA analyzer outside the specified operating temperature
environment.
4 The sidestream AG module configured with ISA OR+ analyzer is fragile and should be
handled with care.
5 After plugging the module into the monitor, remember to connect the sampling line to
the module to prevent dust ingress which may result in performance degradation.

17.2.2 Safety Information for IRMA Module


WARNING
1 The IRMA probe is intended for use by authorized and trained medical personnel
only.
2 The IRMA probe must not be used with flammable anesthetic agents.
3 Disposable IRMA airway adapters shall not be reused. Used disposable airway
adapters shall be disposed of in accordance with local regulations for medical wastes;
otherwise, it may cause environmental contamination.

- 124 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

WARNING
4 Do not use the IRMA Adult/Pediatric adapter with infants as the adapter adds 6 ml
dead space to the patient circuit.
5 Do not use the IRMA airway adapter with adults as this may cause excessive flow
resistance.
6 Measurements can be affected by mobile and RF communications equipment. It
should be assured that the IRMA probe is used in the electromagnetic environment
specified in this manual.
7 Use of high frequency electrosurgical equipment may enhance the risk of being
burned; therefore, a static-free or conductive respiratory cannula is not
recommended.
8 Do not place the IRMA airway adapter between the endotracheal tube and an elbow
as this may allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows and result in
incorrect operation.

9 Do not use the IRMA airway adapter with metered dose inhalers or nebulized
medications as this may affect the light transmission of the airway adapter windows.
10 The IRMA probe is intended only as an adjunct in patient assessment. It must be used
in conjunction with other assessment of clinical signs and symptoms.
11 Incorrect probe zeroing will result in false gas readings.
12 Incorrect agent selection by the user for IRMA AX (no automatic agent identification)
will result in false agent readings.
13 Using IRMA AX (no automatic identification) with gas mixtures containing more than
one agent will result in false agent readings.
14 Replace the adapter if rainout/condensation occurs inside the airway adapter.
15 Use only PHASEIN manufactured IRMA airway adapters.

CAUTION
1 Do not apply tension to the probe cable.
2 Do not operate the IRMA probe outside the specified operating temperature
environment.

- 125 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

17.3 Monitoring Steps


17.3.1 Monitoring Steps for ISA Analyzer

17.3.1.1 Performing a Pre-use Check


Before connecting the Nomoline sampling line to the breathing circuit, do the following:
1. Connect the sampling line to the ISA gas inlet connector (LEGI).
2. Check that the LEGI shows a steady green light (indicating that the system is OK).
3. For ISA OR+ and ISA AX+ module with O2 option fitted: Check that the O2 reading on the
monitor is correct (21%).
4. Breathe into the sampling line and check that valid CO2 waveforms and values are displayed
on the monitor.
5. Occlude the sampling line with a fingertip and wait for 10 seconds.
6. Check that an occlusion alarm is displayed and that the LEGI shows a flashing red light.
7. If applicable: Perform a tightness check of the patient circuit with the sampling line attached.

17.3.1.2 Leakage Check


1. Connect a new Nomoline sampling line with male luer lock to the ISA LEGI and check that
the LEGI shows a steady green light.
2. Connect a short silicon tubing with an inner diameter of 3/32” (2.4 mm) to the Nomoline
male luer.
3. Exhale a long breath into the silicon tubing until the CO2 concentration is greater than 4.5
vol% or 34 mmHg.
4. Quickly connect the silicon tubing tightly to the exhaust port.
5. Wait 1 minute until the CO2 concentration has stabilized. Note the value.
6. Wait 1 minute and check that the CO2 concentration has not decreased more than 0.4 vol% or
3 mmHg. If it has decreased more there is a major leakage in the ISA unit or in the Nomoline.
Do not operate the ISA if there is a major leakage in the unit.

17.3.1.3 System Setup for Analyzer


If your system is using the plug-in and measure ISA analyzer, please follow the setup instructions
below:
1. Connect the ISA analyzer interface cable to the monitor.
2. Connect a Nomoline sampling line to the ISA analyzer input connector.
3. Connect the gas sample exhaust port to a scavenging system or return the gas to the patient
circuit.
4. Power up the monitor.

- 126 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

5. A green LED indicates that the ISA analyzer is ready for use.
6. Perform a pre-use check as described in section Perform a pre-use Check.

17.3.1.4 Zeroing
The infrared module needs to establish a zero reference level for the CO2, N2O and anesthetic
agent gas measurement. This zero calibration is here referred to as "zeroing".
ISA analyzer performs zeroing automatically by switching the gas sampling from the respiratory
circuit to ambient air. The automatic zeroing is performed every 24 hours, and takes less than 3
seconds for ISA CO2 module and less than 10 seconds for ISA analyzer.
If the ISA analyzer is fitted with an oxygen sensor, the automatic zeroing will also include room
air calibration of the oxygen sensor.

WARNING
Since a successful zeroing requires the presence of ambient air (21% O2 and 0% CO2),
ensure that the ISA analyzer is placed in a well ventilated place. Avoid breathing near the
ISA analyzer before or during the zeroing procedure.

17.3.1.5 Cleaning
The ISA sidestream gas analyzers and Nomoline Adapter can be cleaned using a cloth moistened
(not wet) with max 70% ethanol or isopropyl alcohol.
To prevent cleaning liquids and dust from entering the ISA gas analyzer through its LEGI
connector, keep the Nomoline Family sampling line connected while cleaning the analyzer.
CAUTION
Never immerse the ISA sidestream gas analyzer in liquid.

17.3.1.6 Maintenance
Once every year, or whenever gas readings are questionable, perform a leakage check according
to section 17.3.1.2 and verify gas readings with a reference instrument or with calibration gas.

WARNING
The Nomoline sampling lines are non-sterile devices. To avoid damage, do not autoclave
any parts of the sampling line.

17.3.1.7 Replacement of Consumables


The Nomoline and Nomoline Airway Adapter Set are single-patient use products.
The Nomoline Adapter is a multiple-patient use product.
The T-adapter and Nomo Extension are single-patient use products.

- 127 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

All consumables mentioned above should be replaced according to good clinical practice or when
an occlusion message appears. Occlusion occurs when the sample flow is too low. This is
indicated by a flashing red LEGI together with a message on the monitor.

17.3.1.8 MAC Calculation


The MAC value is calculated and displayed by using end-tidal (Et) gas concentrations according
to the following formula:
% Et ( AA1) % Et ( AA2) % Et ( N 2O)
MAC  + +
X ( AA1) X ( AA2) 100
X (AA): HAL=0.75%, ENF=1.7%, ISO=1.15%, SEV=2.05%, DES=6.0%

NOTE:
Altitude, patient age and other individual factors are not considered in the formula above.

17.3.2 Monitoring Steps for IRMA Module


1. Plug the IRMA connector into the IRMA input and switch the power on.
2. Snap the IRMA sensor head on the top of the IRMA airway adapter. It will click into place
when properly seated.

3. A green LED indicates that the IRMA probe is ready for use.

4. Connect IRMA /airway adapter 15mm male connector to the breathing circuit Y-piece.

- 128 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

5. Connect the IRMA /airway adapter 15mm female connector to the patient’s endotracheal
tube.

Alternatively, connect an HME (Heat Moisture Exchanger) between the patient’s endotracheal
tube and the IPMA probe. Placing an HME in front of the IRMA probe protects the airway
adapter from secretions and effects of water vapor and eliminates the need of changing the
adapter. It allows free positioning of the IRMA probe as well.

6. Unless the IRMA probe is protected with an HME always position the IRMA probe with the
status LED pointing upwards.

- 129 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

17.3.2.1 Placement of IRMA Probe


When connecting IRMA probe to an infant patient circuit, it is important to avoid a direct contact
between the IRMA probe and the infant’s body. If, for whatever the reason, the IRMA probe is in
direct contact with any parts of the infant’s body, an insulation material shall be placed between
the IRMA probe and the body.

WARNING
The IRMA probe is not intended to be in long term skin contact.

17.3.2.2 Performing a Pre-use Check


Prior to connecting the IRMA airway adapter to the breathing circuit, verify gas readings and
waveforms on the monitor before connecting the airway adapter to the patient circuit.
Perform the tightness check of the patient circuit with the IRMA probe snapped on the IRMA
airway adapter.

17.3.2.3 Zeroing
WARNING
Incorrect probe zeroing will result in false gas readings.

In order to secure high precision of the IRMA probe measurements the following zeroing
recommendations should be followed.
Zeroing is performed by snapping a new IRMA airway adapter onto the IRMA probe, without
connecting the airway adapter to the patient circuit, and then using the host instrument to transmit
a zero reference command to the IRMA probe.
Special care should be taken to avoid breathing near the airway adapter before or during the
zeroing procedure. The presence of ambient air (21% O2 and 0% CO2) in the IRMA airway
adapter is of crucial importance for a successful zeroing. If a “Zero Required” alarm should
appear directly after a zeroing procedure, the procedure has to be repeated.
Always perform a pre-use check after zeroing the probe.

- 130 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

Zeroing for IRMA AX+ probes:


Zeroing should be performed every time the IRMA airway adapter is replaced, or whenever an
offset in gas values or an unspecified gas accuracy message is displayed.
Allow 30 seconds for warm up of the IRMA AX+ probes after power on and after changing the
IRMA airway adapter before proceeding with the Zeroing Procedure. The green LED on the
probe will be blinking for approximately 5 seconds while zeroing is in progress.

17.3.2.4 Cleaning
The IRMA probe can be cleaned using a cloth moistened with maximum 70% ethanol or
maximum 70% isopropyl alcohol.
Remove the disposable IRMA airway adapter prior to cleaning the IRMA probe.

CAUTION
1 The IRMA airway adapters are non-sterile devices. Do not autoclave the devices as
this will damage them.
2 Never immerse the IRMA probe in liquid.

17.3.2.5 Maintenance
Gas readings should be verified at regular intervals with a reference instrument or by conducting
the gas check. The suggested interval is once every year.
17.3.2.6 MAC Calculation
The MAC value is calculated and displayed by using end-tidal (ET) gas concentrations according
to the following formula:
MAC=%ET(AA1)/X(AA1)+%ET(AA2)/X(AA2)+%ET(N2O)/100
X(AA): HAL=0.75%, ENF=1.7%, ISO=1.15%, SEV=2.05%, DES=6.0%

17.4 Setting Apnea Alarm Time


This determines the time limit after which the monitor gives an alarm if the patient stops
breathing.
1 Select the CO2 (AG) Setup > Apnea Alarm;
2 Choose the apnea alarm time from the pull-down list.

- 131 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

17.5 Working Status of ISA analyzer


Working status of the ISA analyzer can be indicated by the indicator. For the detailed information,
please refer to the following table.
Indication Status
Steady green light System OK
Blinking green light Zeroing in progress
Steady blue light Anesthetic agent present
Steady red light Sensor error
Blinking red light Check sampling line

17.6 Working Status of IRMA Module


The working status of the IRMA module can be transmitted by the IRMA probe. For the detailed
information, please refer to the following table.
Indication Status
Steady green light System OK
Blinking green light Zeroing in progress
Steady blue light Anesthetic agent present
Steady red light Sensor error
Blinking red light Check adapter

17.7 O2 Compensations
The following models need O2 compensation: IRMA AX+, ISA AX+. For the compensation
details, please refer to the following table.
O2 Range Set O2 Range
0 to 30 vol% Low
30 to 70 vol% Med.
70 to 100 vol% High

17.8 Effects of Humidity


The partial pressure and the volume percentage of CO2, N2O, O2 and anesthetic agents depend on
the amount of water vapor in the measured gas. The O2 measurement will be calibrated to show
20.8 vol% at actual ambient temperature and humidity level, instead of showing actual partial
pressure. 20.8 vol% O2 corresponds to the actual O2 concentration in room air with 0.7 vol% H2O

- 132 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring AG

concentration (at 1013 hPa this equals for example 25°C and 23% RH). The measurement of CO2,
N2O, and anesthetic agents (e.g. all gases measured by the IR-bench) will always show the actual
partial pressure at the current humidity level.
In the alveoli of the patient, the breathing gas is saturated with water vapor at body temperature
(BTPS).
When the breathing gas flows through the sampling line, the gas temperature will adapt to
ambient before reaching the gas analyzer. As the NOMO section removes all condensed water, no
water will reach the ISA gas analyzer. The relative humidity of the sampled gas will be about
95%.
If CO2 values at BTPS are required, the following equation can be used:

where:
EtCO2 = EtCO2 value sent from ISA [vol %]
Pamb = Ambient pressure sent from ISA [kPa]
3.8 = Typical partial pressure of water vapor condensed between patient circuit and ISA [kPa]
EtCO2(BTPS) = EtCO2 gas concentration at BTPS [vol%]
O2 is assumed to be room air calibrated at a humidity level of 0.7 vol% H2O.

- 133 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

Chapter 18 Monitoring BIS*


*Not available in the U.S.A.

18.1 Overview
Bispectral Index monitoring helps to monitor the hypnotic state of the brain based on acquisition
and processing of EEG signals. The monitor processes raw EEG signals to produce a single
number, namely BIS, which correlates with the patient's level of hypnosis.

Sensor check key

Connector for BIS adapted cable

The V-BIS module and BISx device provide the monitor with the display consisting of:
 BIS EEG waveform
 BIS trend
 Measure values of BIS, SQI, SR, SEF, TP and BC
- BIS: The BIS numeric reflects the patient’s level of consciousness. It ranges from 100 (fully
awake) to 0 (absence of electrical brain activity). The BIS range guidelines are illustrated in
the following chart.

- 134 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

BIS Range and Clinical State

100 Awake
 Responds to normal voice

80 Light/ Moderate Sedation


 May respond to loud commands or mild prodding/shaking
BIS Index Range

General Anesthesia
60  Low probability of explicit recall
 Unresponsive to verbal stimulus

40 Deep Hypnotic State

20  Burst Suppression

0 Flat Line EEG

Note: This chart reflects a general association between clinical state and BIS
values. Ranges are based on results from a multi-center study of the BIS
involving the administration of specific anesthetic agents. BIS values and
ranges assume that the EEG is free of artifacts that can affect its
performance. Titration of anesthetics to BIS range should be dependent upon
the individual goals established for each patient. These goals and associated
BIS ranges may vary over time and in the context of patient status and
treatment plan.

- SQI: The SQI numeric reflects the signal quality for the EEG channel source and provides
information about the reliability of the BIS, SR, SEF, TP and BC numerics during the last
minute. It ranges from 0% to 100%:
0% to15%: the numerics cannot be derived.
15% to 50%: the numerics cannot be reliably derived.
50% to 100%: the numerics are reliable.
- SR: The SR is the percentage of time over the last 63-second period that the signal is
considered to be in the suppressed state.
- SEF: The SEF is a frequency below which 95% of the total power is measured.
- TP: The TP numeric indicates the power in the frequency band 0.5Hz to 30Hz. The useful
range is 40dB to 100 dB.

- 135 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

- BC: (BISx device used with Extend Sensor only) The BC numeric helps to quantify
suppression, reported as the number of EEG bursts per minute, where an EEG burst is
defined as a period of activity followed and preceded by inactivity (at least 0.5 second). The
BC numeric is valid when SQI≥15% and SR≥5%.
 EMG bar graph: The EMG bar graph displays the power (in decibels) in the frequency range
70-110Hz. This frequency range contains power from muscle activity (i.e.,
electromyography or “EMG”) as well as power from other high-frequency artifacts. When
the indicator is low, it indicates that EMG activity is low. BIS monitoring conditions are
optimal when the bar is empty.
1 bar represents power in the 30-34 range.
2 bars represent power in the 35-39 range.
3 bars represent power in the 40-44 range.
4 bars represent power in the 45-49 range.
5 bars represent power in the 50-54 range.
6 bars represent power in the 55-59 range.
7 bars represent power in the 60-64 range.
8 bars represent power in the 65-69 range.
9 bars represent power in the 70-74 range.
10 bars represent power greater than 74.

- 136 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

18.2 Safety Information


WARNING
1 Explosion hazard: Do not use the BISx device in a flammable atmosphere or where
concentrations of flammable anesthetics may occur.
2 The BISx device is not designed for use in MRI environment.
3 The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety
requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include: use of the accessory in the
patient vicinity; evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been
performed in accordance to the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and/or IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
4 Due to elevated surface temperature, do not place the BISx device in prolonged
direct contact with patient’s skin, as it may cause discomfort.
5 The conductive parts of electrodes or sensor and connectors should not contact
other conductive parts, including earth.
6 To reduce the hazard of burns during use of high- frequency surgical equipment, the
sensor or electrodes should not be located between the surgical site and the
electro-surgical unit return electrode.
7 To reduce the hazard of burns during use of brain-stimulating devices (e.g.,
transcranial electrical motor evoked potential), place stimulating electrodes as far as
possible from the BIS sensor and make certain that sensor is placed according to
package instructions.
8 The sensor must not be located between defibrillator pads when a defibrillator is
used on a patient connected to the BISx device.
9 To minimize the risk of patient strangulation, the patient interface cable (PIC) must
be carefully placed and secured.
10 Universal precautions shall be observed to prevent contact with blood or other
potentially infectious materials. Place contaminated materials in regulated waste
container.
11 Whenever an event such as spillage of blood or solutions occurs, re-test ground
leakage current before further use.
12 Do not reuse the BIS sensor.

- 137 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

CAUTION
1 Do not autoclave the BISx device. Autoclaving will seriously damage the
components.
2 Do not open the BISx device for any reason.
3 The BISx device has been designed to operate with a BIS sensor. The sensor is a
silver/silver chloride electrode array that utilizes Aspect's patented Zipprep™
technology and uses a proprietary connector. Use of other electrodes is not
recommended.
4 Considerations when using Electro-Convulsive Therapy (ECT) equipment during BIS
monitoring: Place ECT electrodes as far as possible from the BIS sensor to minimize
the effect of interference. Certain ECT equipment may interfere with the proper
function of the BISx device. Check for compatibility of equipment during patient
setup.
5 Avoid liquid ingress to the Patient Interface Cable. Contact of fluids with the PIC
sensor connector can interfere with PIC performance.
6 When connecting or disconnecting the BISx device, take care not to touch the
exposed contacts of either connector. Damage due to electrostatic discharge may
result.
7 Using accessories other than those specified may result in increased
electromagnetic emissions or decreased electromagnetic immunity of the BISx
device.
8 The BISx device should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If
adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the BISx device should be observed to verify
normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.

- 138 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

18.3 BIS Monitoring Setup

Patient
V-BIS module interface
cable (PIC)

BISx device

Adapter cable
BIS sensor

1. Connect the BISx device to the V-BIS module with the adapter cable and plug the V-BIS
module into the monitor.
2. Using the attachment clip, secure the BISx device to a convenient location near the patient's
head.
3. Prepare sensor site and place the BIS sensor on the patient in accordance with the
instructions included on the sensor packaging. Make sure that the patient’s skin is dry. Be
aware that a wet sensor or a salt bridge may cause erroneous BIS and impedance values.
4. Attach the BIS sensor to the PIC. To insert the sensor into the PIC, line up as shown and
insert the sensor tab into the PIC sensor connector until an audible “click” is heard. The
blank side of the sensor tab (i.e. the side without the computer chip) should be facing up.

CAUTION
1 Ensure that the BISx device does not come into prolonged contact with your patient’s
skin, as it may generate heat and cause discomfort.
2 The BISx device may remain connected to a patient during defibrillation as long as
the sensor is not located between the defibrillator pads.

NOTE:
After you switch the operating mode of the monitor into monitoring mode from demo
mode, you need to re-plug the V-BIS module into the monitor before starting BIS
measurement.

- 139 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

18.4 BIS Continuous Impedance Check


The continuous impedance check is always active to enable you to understand the sensor
condition in real time. It checks:
 The combined impedance of the signal electrodes and the reference electrode
This is done continuously and does not affect the EEG wave. As long as the impedances are
within the valid range, no prompt message of this check or its results will be announced
 The impedance of the ground electrode
This is done every ten minutes and takes approximately four seconds. It causes an artifact in the
EEG wave, and the monitor will announce BIS Ground Check on the screen during the check. If
the ground electrode does not pass the check, another check will be performed. This continues
until the ground electrode passes the check.

18.5 BIS Sensor Check


This measures the exact impedance of each individual electrode. It causes a disturbed EEG wave.

18.5.1 Starting a Sensor Check


The sensor check is automatically started when a sensor is connected. To manually start a sensor
check:
 press the hard key on the V-BIS module, or
 select BIS Setup > Sensor States and click Start Sensor Check.

18.5.2 Stopping a Sensor Check


The sensor check stops automatically if the impedances of all electrodes are within the valid
range. To manually stop a sensor check:
 press the hard key on the V-BIS module, or
 select BIS Setup > Sensor States and click Stop Sensor Check.

- 140 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

18.6 BIS Sensor Window


To open the BIS sensor window, select Sensor States on the BIS Setup menu.
The window may look slightly different on your monitor. The graphic in the BIS sensor window
automatically adapts to show the type of sensor in use. Each symbol in the graphic represents an
electrode and illustrates the most recently-measured impedance status of the electrodes. Although
BIS may still be measured when the electrode is in Noise or High status, for best performance, all
electrodes should be in Pass status.

① The time at which the last sensor check was completed

② Click this button to open a window in which information of the sensor in use is displayed.

BIS Impedance Indicators

Color Status Electrode-to-skin impedance Action

Green Pass The impedance is within the No action necessary.


acceptable range.

Red Noise The electrode impedance cannot


Check the senor-to-skin contact.
be determined due to electrical
Press the edges of the sensor to
interference (noise) from another
ensure adhesion and proper
source. contact.  If the problem persists,
remove sensor, clean skin
High The impedance is above the thoroughly, and reapply sensor or
limit. apply new sensor in accordance
with instructions on the sensor
packaging.

Lead Off Electrode has no skin contact. Reconnect electrode, or check the
sensor-to-skin contact. If
necessary, clean and dry skin.

- 141 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring BIS

18.7 Changing the BIS Smoothing Rate


The smoothing rate defines how the monitor averages the BIS value. With the decline in
smoothing rate, the monitor provides increased responsiveness to changes in the patient’s state.
Contrarily, the monitor provides a smoother BIS trend with decreased variability and sensitivity
to artifacts.
To change the smoothing rate, open the BIS Setup menu and set Smoothing Rate to 10 sec, 15
sec or 30 sec.

18.8 Switching Secondary Parameters On and Off


A maximum of four secondary parameters can be added to display on the BIS parameter area.
Select BIS Setup > Secondary Parameter Select and select four secondary parameter
maximum.

18.9 Changing the Scale of the EEG Wave


1. Open the BIS Wave Setup menu;
2. Select the appropriate setting from the Scale list.

18.10 Setting the Trend Length


1. Open the BIS Wave Setup menu;
2. Select the appropriate length of time for BIS trend from the Trend Length list.

18.11 Switching BIS Filters On or Off


1. Open the BIS Wave Setup menu;
2. Set Filters to On or Off.

- 142 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

Chapter 19 Monitoring RM*


*Not available in the U.S.A.

19.1 Overview
The monitor measures respiratory mechanics by connecting the RM module with the flow sensor
to produce numerics and waveforms for flow, volume and pressure of respiratory gases in the
airway.

Connector for CO2


sensor

Flow input receptacle

The measurement provides:


 Airway pressure (Paw), airway flow (Flow) and airway volume (Vol) waveforms.
 Numerics for:
– PIP (peak inspiratory pressure)
– Pplat (plateau pressure)
– PEEP (positive end expiratory pressure)
– Pmean (mean airway pressure)
– PIF (peak inspiratory flow)
– PEF (peak expiratory flow)
– TVi (inspiratory tidal volume)
– TVe (expiratory tidal volume)
– MVi (inspiratory minute volume)
– MVe (expiratory minute volume)
– I:E (ratio of the inspiratory time and expiratory time)
– Cdyn (dynamic compliance)

- 143 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

– Cstatic (static compliance)


– RAWi (airway resistance-inspired)
– RAWe (airway resistance-expired)
– NIP (negative inspiratory pressure)
– RSBI (rapid shallow breathing index)
– P0.1 (airway pressure at 100 msec after the start of inspiration )
– AwRR (airway respiration rate)
– EtCO2 (end-tidal carbon dioxide
– FiCO2 (fraction of inspired carbon dioxide)
Also, the measurement provides F-V (flow-volume) loops and P-V (pressure-volume) loops. For
detailed information about loops, refer to 19.8 Respiratory Loops.

19.2 Safety Information


WARNING
1 EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do not use the RM module in the presence of flammable
anesthetics or other flammable gasses when mixed with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide.
Use of the RM module in such environment may present an explosion hazard.
2 Follow precautions for electrostatic discharge (ESD) and electromagnetic
interference (EMI) to and from other equipment.
3 If the RM module fails to respond as described in this manual, do not use it until
approved for use by qualified personnel.
4 Do not position the sensor cables or tubing in any manner that may cause
entanglement or strangulation.
5 Do not apply excessive tension to any cable or pneumatic tubing.
6 ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - The RM module contains no user serviceable
parts. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
7 Reuse (disassembly, cleaning, disinfecting, sterilizing, etc.) of the single patient use
flow and CO2/flow sensors may compromise device functionality and system
performance and cause a potential patient hazard. Performance is not guaranteed if
a sensor is reused.
8 Inspect the flow and CO2/flow sensors prior to use and periodically during use. Do
not use them if they appear to be damaged or broken.
9 Do not attempt to rotate a sensor in the breathing circuit by grasping the pneumatic
tubes exiting the flow sensor.
10 Periodically inspect sensor tubing for kinks.

- 144 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

WARNING
11 Replace the flow or CO2/flow sensor if excessive moisture or secretions are
observed in the pressure line tubing.
12 The RM module automatically identifies the type of sensor (adult, pediatric or
neonatal) when it is connected. If the module does not identify the sensor when a
sensor is first connected, do not use the sensor. If the condition persists, refer the
module to qualified service personnel.
13 The use of the RM module is restricted to one patient at a time. Do not connect the
sensors to multiple patients simultaneously.
14 The flow or CO2/flow sensor connector should be properly inserted into the host
receptacle prior to connecting a sensor to the breathing circuit, in order to avoid a
circuit leak, or occlusion of sensor tubing.
15 Periodically check sensors and tubing for excessive moisture or secretion build up.
16 Although the RM module automatically purges the lines, moisture or secretions may
still remain.
17 While using the sensors, a system leak, such as that caused by uncuffed
endotracheal tubes or a damaged sensor may significantly affect flow related
readings. These include flow, volume, pressure, deadspace, CO2 production and
other respiratory mechanics parameters.
18 The use of portable and mobile radio frequency (RF) communications equipment can
affect this and other pieces of medical equipment.
19 The use of accessories, sensors and cables other than those specified by the
manufacturer may increase emissions or decrease immunity of the equipment.
20 The patient sensors must not be located between defibrillator pads when a
defibrillator is used on a patient.
21 To reduce the hazard of burns in the high-frequency surgical neutral electrode
connection, the patient sensors should not be located between the surgical site and
the electro-surgical unit return electrode.
22 The RM module is not intended to be used as an apnea monitor.

CAUTION
1 Always inspect the flow or CO2/flow sensor set-up in ventilator prior to use. Insure
that the patient flow connector is positively latched prior to use.
2 Always verify that the flow or CO2/flow sensor type is correctly identified by the
system prior to use.
3 Always remove the flow or CO2/flow sensor from the patient circuit before
disconnecting the sensor from the module.

- 145 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

CAUTION
4 Do not use the module if it appears to be damaged.
5 Do not use the RM module if it fails to operate properly, appears to have been
damaged, is wet or has exterior condensation.
6 Do not clean the RM module and accessories except as directed in this manual.
7 Use only approved sensors and accessories with the RM module.
8 Do not spray cleaning agents directly into the flow sensor receptacles.
9 Never sterilize or immerse the module in liquids.
10 Do not sterilize or immerse sensors except as directed in this manual.
11 To avoid the effects of excessive moisture in the measurement circuit, insert the flow
or CO2/flow sensor in the ventilator circuit with the tubes upright. Improper placement
may result in erroneous data.
12 Excessive moisture in the flow or CO2/flow sensor tubing may affect the accuracy of
the measurements.
13 It is recommended that the CO2/flow sensors be removed from the circuit whenever
an aerosolized medication is delivered. These medications may contaminate the
sensor windows, causing the sensor to fail prematurely.
14 The use of some aerosolized medications may affect the accuracy of the flow only
sensors.
15 Sudden erratic changes in the CO2 and pressure waveforms that do not correlate to
the physiological condition of the patient may be signs that the module is
experiencing electromagnetic interference.
16 The RM module complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2001, providing reasonable protection
against electromagnetic interference in a typical medical installation. The equipment
generates, uses and can radiate electromagnetic interference (EMI), and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause interference with
other devices in the vicinity.
17 If interference does occur, correct it using one or more of the following measures:
– Move the receiving device or increase separation between the equipment.
– Consult the manufacturer or members of the hospital’s engineering department for
more information.
18 The RM module is not intended for use in a hyperbaric chamber or an MRI (Magnetic
Resonance Imaging) environment.

- 146 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

NOTE:
1 Set the gas compensation on module startup, and whenever the nominal gas
composition delivered to the patient is changed.
2 This product and its accessories which have patient contact are free of latex.
3 The following factors can influence CO2 and flow measurement: nitrous oxide,
barometric pressure, temperature, humidity, airway pressure, O2, helium and
anesthetic agents.

19.3 Sensor Setup


1. Select the appropriate flow or CO2/flow sensor in accordance with patient category.
2. If you are using a combined CO2/flow sensor, connect it to the CO2 sensor first. Snap the
airway adapter until it clicks into place.
3. Before connecting the flow or CO2/flow sensor to the breathing circuit, insert its connector
into the receptacle on the RM module.
4. Position the flow or CO2/flow sensor into the breathing circuit between the wye and the
elbow. Some patient circuit examples are shown below:

To ventilator

To patient

Adult CO2/Flow Sensor with CO2 Sensor Attached

To ventilator

To patient

Pediatric CO2/Flow Sensor with CO2 Sensor Attached

- 147 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

To ventilator

To patient

Neonatal CO2/Flow Sensor with CO2 Sensor Attached

NOTE:
1 The flow or CO2/flow sensor type is detected when the sensor is connected to the
RM module. The flow sensor type is communicated to the monitor. Flow sensors are
uniquely identifiable based on connector design.
2 Adult, pediatric and neonatal flow or CO2/flow sensor bodies are color-coded to
assist the user in identifying that the correct type of flow sensor is being used. For
more information on which sensor to use, refer to 31.10 RM Accessories.

19.4 Zero Calibration


The zero calibration is performed automatically during measurement. Also, a manual zero
calibration can be started whenever major errors of measurements are detected or the numerical
accuracy is in doubt. To manually zero the sensor, select Zero on the RM Setup menu to initiate
a zero calibration.

19.5 Purging
The RM module features an automatic and manual purge function which provides a flush of room
air to keep the sensor tubing free from water condensation and patient secretions.

19.5.1 Automatic Purging


An automatic purging is performed during measurement at the intervals varying with different
types of sensors. In adult mode, the system purges the sensor tubing every 10 minutes, while in
neonatal or pediatric mode, the purge cycle will be at every 3 minutes.

19.5.2 Manual Purging


A manual purging may be required when water condensation is accumulated in the sensor tubing
or the flow wave is abnormal. To perform a manual purging, select Purge on the RM Setup
menu to initiate a purge cycle.

- 148 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

19.6 Gas Compensation


The proportions of anesthetic gases in the airway will influence the flow measurement; thus, gas
compensation is required for correcting the calculation. Gas compensation can be finished by
using the manually entered gas concentrations.
If the airway gas conditions are not properly set in the monitor, the measured flow will be
incorrect. The measurement error is dependent on the airway gas conditions, flow rate and
barometric pressure. The table below is an example of the magnitude of error to expect. The first
line in the table is the baseline gas conditions at a flow rate of 40 L/min and a barometric pressure
of 760 mmHg. Each of the successive lines in the table is the error to expect in the flow
measurement with the specified gas condition if the airway gas conditions were improperly set to
the baseline conditions in the first line.

Gas Compensation Effects on Flow


Measurement
N2 O2 CO2 N2O Helium Agent Temperature Humidity
Error
79 21 0 0 0 0 35° C 50% ---
79 16 5 0 0 0 35° C 50% + 2.8 %
40 60 0 0 0 0 35° C 50% - 2.5 %
0 40 0 60 0 0 35° C 50% - 14.9 %
35 60 0 0 0 5 35° C 50% - 19.6 %
0 30 0 0 70 0 35° C 50% + 56.7 %
79 21 0 0 0 0 35° C 0% - 0.5 %
79 21 0 0 0 0 35° C 100% + 0.4 %
79 21 0 0 0 0 25° C 50% - 2.1 %

NOTE:
1 Set the gas compensation on module startup, and whenever gas compensation
delivered to the patient is changed.
2 Gas compensations must sum to 100%; if less than 100%, the percent of balance
gas is assumed according to selected gas compensations.

19.6.1 Changing the Concentration of Inspired O2 and Inspired Agents


1. Select RM Setup > Other Setups to open the Air Compensation window.
2. Select the appropriate settings for the O2 Compens. and Anest. Agent items.

19.6.2 Changing the Type of Balance Gas


1. Select RM Setup > Other Setups to open the Air Compensation window.
2. Select a balance gas from the drop-down list of Balance Gas.

- 149 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

19.6.3 Changing the Temperature of the Inspired and Expired Gas


1. Select RM Setup > Other Setups to open the Air Compensation window.
2. Select the appropriate settings for the Fi Temperature and Et Temperature items.

19.6.4 Changing the Humidity of the Inspired and Expired Gas


1. Select RM Setup > Other Setups to open the Air Compensation window.
2. Select the appropriate settings for the Fi Humidity and Et Humidity items.

19.7 RM Configuration
The following settings are accessible on the RM Setup menu.

19.7.1 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay


This determines the time limit after which the monitor gives an alarm if the patient stops
breathing.
1. Access the RM Setup menu.
2. Choose the apnea alarm delay time from the Apnea Time drop-down list.

19.7.2 Selecting Measured Airway Volume Components


Users can select tidal volume (TV) or minute volume (MV) as the measured airway volume
component for display in the Vol parameter window:
1. Access the RM Setup menu.
2. Choose the item TV/MV and switch between TV and MV.

19.7.3 Changing the Respiration Mode


1. Access the RM Setup menu.
2. Select a mode between Spontaneous and Mechanical from the Ventilation Mode
drop-down list.

19.7.4 Selecting Waveform


To select Flow or Vol waveform for display:
1. Access the RM Setup menu.
2. Choose the item Flow/Vol and switch between Flow and Vol.

19.8 Respiratory Loops


Respiratory loops can indicate a fault in the airway tubing and help physicians to detect
respiratory problems of patients.
The two types of loops are available in real time:

- 150 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring RM

 F-V (flow-volume) loops: it illustrates the dynamic relation between flow and volume during
respiration and provides information about condition of the airway tubing.
 P-V (pressure-volume) loops: it reflects the dynamic relation between pressure and volume
as well as compliance of the respiratory system.

19.8.1 Viewing Loops


To view the respiratory loops, select Respiratory Loop on the RM Setup menu, and the
respiratory loop window will be displayed on the screen. Both graphic representation of the
respiratory loop and the associated keys are available in this window.

19.8.2 Storing and Reviewing Loops


Select the key Save to store the respiratory loops in the current respiratory cycle for reference. Up
to four loops can be stored, and the storing time for the latest four reference loops is displayed
above the loops. The latest stored loops will replace the previously stored loops when the number
of stored loops is over four.
Also, users can review the stored loops by selecting the time tags in the window for displaying
the corresponding stored loops.

19.8.3 Changing Loop Type


To change the loop type, select Respiratory Loop > Setup > Display Loop and choose a loop
type from the drop-down list.

19.8.4 Showing/Hiding the Reference Loop


To show/hide the reference loop, select Respiratory Loop > Setup > Reference Loop and
choose On/Off from the drop-down list.

19.8.5 Resizing the Loops


To resize the loop, select Respiratory Loop > Setup to open the F-V Loop Setup or P-V Loop
Setup window in which you can set up the top ruler and bottom ruler for Paw, Vol and Flow.

- 151 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ICG

Chapter 20 Monitoring ICG*


*Not available in the U.S.A.

20.1 Overview
Impedance cardiography (ICG) monitoring provides hemodynamic parameters based on the
measurement of thoracic electrical bio-impedance. With the V-ICG module, the monitor
determines hemodynamic parameters as well as indexed versions of those parameters, through
which you can assess a patient’s hemodynamic status and ventricular function.

Connector for ICG patient cable

The V-ICG module and the ICG patient cable provide the monitor with an ICG waveform and the
following numerics:
– HR (heart rate)
– SV (stroke volume)
– SVRI (systemic vascular resistance index)
– SI (stroke index)
– C.O. (cardiac output)
– TFC (thoracic fluid content)
– SVR (systemic vascular resistance)
– QI (quality indicator)
– DO2I (oxygen delivery index)
– CI (cardiac index)

- 152 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ICG

20.2 Safety Information


WARNING
1 Only connect one patient at the same time to the V-ICG module.
2 The sensors must not have a direct contact to other electrically conductive materials.
3 Because of hygienic reasons only disposable electrodes/sensors should be used.
4 Before monitoring patients with pacemakers, ensure that the function of the
pacemaker cannot be influenced by the measuring current used for impedance
cardiography. In the case of minute ventilation pacemakers the use of the V-ICG
module and ICG patient cable is not allowed if the minute ventilation function of the
pacemaker is activated.
5 The V-ICG module and ICG patient cable are not intended to be used while exposing
the patient to high frequency current.
6 Handle the ICG patient cable and lead wires carefully and position them so that they
do not cross over each other or other cables or power cords to avoid signal
interference.
7 Do not expose the cables to mechanic or thermic impact. Avoid temperatures above
40 °C (100 °F).

20.3 ICG Patient Cable


The patient cable for impedance cardiography contains a small box, which includes a cable
splitter for the two branches (right and left):

On the outside of the box, two LEDs (green and orange) display the current function of the
patient cable, as indicated below:

- 153 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ICG

Green Orange Description of function

The electric part of the patient cable is not connected with the power
supply; cable is disconnected or the device is switched off

Patient cable is ready to use, but the measurement has not been started

Measurement is running; sensor contact is good

Bad contact between sensors and patient: at least one lead wire is
disconnected or not properly fixed; sensors are too dry (eventually new
sensors are necessary)

Insufficient contact between sensors and patient: at least one lead wire is
disconnected or not properly fixed; sensors are too dry (new sensors are
necessary)

Patient cable has power but the module is not ready for measurement

Legend: LED off LED flashing LED on

20.4 Precautions and Limitations


With the V-ICG module and the ICG patient cable, you can examine adult patients in a resting
position. The measured parameters can be used only if the ICG waveform has sufficient signal
quality and is without artifact.
The method of impedance cardiography (ICG) is based on a theoretical model of blood flow
movement in the thorax (aorta). If the physiological and clinical conditions of the patient are not
in accordance with the assumptions of the model, inaccuracies in the parameters may occur.
The following conditions may adversely affect the accuracy of ICG measurement:
 Septic shock
 Aortic valve regurgitation and defect of septum
 Severe aortic sclerosis, aortic prosthesis
 Severe hypertension (MAP>130mmHg)
 Cardiac arrhythmia
 Tachycardia with a heart rate higher than 200 bpm
 Patient heights below 120cm or above 230cm
 Patient weights less than 30kg or greater than 155kg
 Patient movement

- 154 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ICG

 Aortic balloon or aortic balloon pump


 Simultaneous use of electrical cautery systems during surgical procedures
 During operation on the opened thorax the current distribution can be distorted and can lead
to inaccuracies.

20.5 Starting a Measurement


20.5.1 Measurement Procedure
1. Connect the ICG patient cable to the V-ICG module and plug the V-ICG module into the
monitor.
2. Prepare the patient’s skin and place the ICG sensors on the patient.
3. Correctly enter the patient information.

20.5.2 ICG Sensor Application


Proper sensor placement is essential for accurate measurements.
1. Attach the four dual sensors to the patient. The rectangular shaped end with the heart label
should be positioned closet to the heart.
2. For the neck, use the root of the neck as a reference for vertically locating the rectangular
shaped detecting sensor with the corresponding circular shaped transmitting sensor being
positioned directly superior and in line with the ear lobe.
3. For the thorax, use the xiphoid process as a reference for vertically locating the rectangular
shaped detecting sensor with the corresponding circular shaped transmitting sensor being
positioned directly inferior and along the mid-axillary line.
4. Respectively, the neck and the thorax sensors must be 180-degree opposite to each other.
5. Indentify the right and left (with respect to the patient) branches of the ICG patient cable as
indicated on the patient cable yoke diagram and connect the respective leads in order from
top to bottom: blue, purple, green and orange.

- 155 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Monitoring ICG

Blue
Purple

Green
Orange

20.5.3 Setting Patient Data


Choose ICG Setup > Input Info> Patient Info. Properly set the items including Height, Weight,
Gender and Date of Birth. The setting height should range from 130cm to 250cm; weight 30kg
to 250kg; age 13 to 130. If these items have not been set or the setting patient data is invalid, you
will be prompted to provide relevant information or reset the relevant items.
Choose ICG Setup > Input Info and enter the ICG Input Info menu. The values of
physiological parameters including SYS, DIA, MAP, PAWP, CVP, Hb and SpO2 are available to
set. You can also directly obtain the values of SYS, DIA, MAP, CVP and SpO2 from the monitor
by selecting Get Parameter Value. If any value of SYS, DIA, MAP, CVP or SpO2 is absent or
invalid, the message Fail to get BP/SpO2 Value will appear in the menu.

20.6 Selecting Secondary Parameters


Choose ICG Setup > Secondary Param Select. You can select three secondary parameters to be
displayed on the ICG parameter area for your preference.

- 156 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Freeze

Chapter 21 Freeze
When monitoring a patient, the user may freeze the waveforms and examine them. Generally, the
user can review a frozen waveform of a maximum of 12 minutes. The freeze function of this
monitor has the following features:
 Freeze status can be activated on any operating screen.
 Once entering the Freeze status, the system exits all other operating menus. Besides, the
system freezes all waveforms in the Waveform area of the Basic Screen, and also freezes
Full Lead ECG waveforms and extra waveforms on the Full Lead ECG interface (if any).
Nevertheless the Parameter area refreshes normally.
 The frozen waveforms can be reviewed and recorded.

21.1 Entering/Exiting Freeze Status


21.1.1 Entering Freeze Status

In the Non-Freeze status, press the button on the control panel of the monitor to exit the
current menu. Freeze status is entered and the popup Freeze menu is displayed. In Freeze status,
all waveforms are frozen and will no longer be refreshed.

21.1.2 Exiting Freeze Status


In the Freeze status, executing any of the following operations will command the system to exit
the Freeze status:
 Exit the Freeze menu;

 Press the button on the control panel again;


 Execute any operation that may trigger the adjustment of the screen or the display of a new
menu.
After exiting Freeze status, the system will clear screen waveforms and resume displaying
real-time waveforms. In the Screen Refresh mode, the system will sweep the waveforms from left
to right in the Waveform Area.

Press the button on the control panel, and the Freeze menu will appear on the bottom part
of the screen. At the same time, the system freezes the waveforms.

NOTE:

Pressing the button repeatedly over a short period of time may result in
discontinuous waveforms on the screen.

- 157 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Freeze

21.2 Reviewing Frozen Waveform


By moving the frozen waveform, you may review a waveform of 12 minutes before it is frozen.
For a waveform of less than 12 minutes, the remaining part is displayed as a straight line. Select
Time on the Freeze menu and use the up/down arrow keys to move the frozen waves so that you
can review the other parts of the frozen waves not displayed on the current screen.

- 158 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Review

Chapter 22 Review
The monitor provides 150-hour trend data of all parameters, storage of 1200 NIBP measurement
results and 200 alarm events. This chapter gives detailed instruction for review of all data.

22.1 Trend Graph Review


■ The latest 1-hour trend is displayed every 1 or 5 seconds.
■ The latest 150-hour trend is displayed every 1, 5 or 10 minutes.
To review Trend Graph, please press the Trend Graph key on the screen or select Menu >
Review > Trend Graph, then the trend graph interface is displayed.
In the trend graph, the y-axis stands for the measurement value and x-axis stands for the time.

22.1.1 Selecting Trend Graph of Specific Parameter


The monitor can review trend graph of different parameters. To change the existing trend graph,
please select Menu > Review > Trend Graph and select a required parameter name from the
popup list.

22.1.2 Adjusting Trend Scale


You can use Zoom on the trend graph review interface to adjust the trend scale. Once you adjust
the trend scale on the trend graph review interface, you also change the trend scale of the related
parameters for the screen trend displayed on the main screen.

- 159 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Review

22.1.3 Setting Resolution


The monitor can support five kinds of resolutions. To set an appropriate resolution, please select
Menu > Review > Trend Graph and an interface is displayed. Choose Resolution on the
interface to open the list and select an appropriate resolution among 1 sec, 5 sec, 1 min, 5 min
and 10 min.

22.1.4 Scrolling Left and Right the Screen


All trend graphs can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen limitation. The user
can scroll left and right the screen manually to see measurement trends that do not fit in the
current view by selecting and pressing the symbol and displayed on the trend graph.

22.1.5 Switching to the Trend Table


The user can switch to the trend table interface on the Trend Graph interface. To do so, please
select Menu > Review > Trend Graph and select the Trend Table option from the popup
interface.

22.1.6 Record
The monitor can make a tabular trend recording of the data in the current trend graph window.
The report will use the current trend interval settings. For the detailed information about
recording the trend graph, please refer to Chapter Recording.

22.2 Trend Table Review


To review the trend table, please press the Trend Table key on the screen or select Menu >
Review > Trend Table, then the trend table is displayed.

22.2.1 Setting Resolution


The monitor can support seven kinds of interval. To set an appropriate resolution, please select
Menu > Review > Trend Table and an interface is displayed. Choose Resolution on the
interface to open the list and select an appropriate interval among 1 sec, 5 sec, 1 min, 5 min, 10
min, 30 min and 60 min.

22.2.2 Scrolling the Screen


All trend tables can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen limitation. The user can
scroll left, right, up and down the screen manually to see measurement trend tables that do not fit
in the current view by selecting and pressing the symbol , , and displayed on the
trend graph.

22.2.3 Switching to Trend Graph


The user can switch to the trend graph on the Trend Table interface. To do so, please select
Menu > Review > Trend Table and select the Trend Graph option from the popup interface.

- 160 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Review

22.2.4 Recording
The monitor can make a tabular trend recording of the data in the current trend graph window.
The report will use the current trend interval settings. For the detailed information about
recording the trend table, please refer to Chapter Recording.

22.3 NIBP Review


To review the NIBP measurement data, select the NIBP Review key on the screen or select
Menu > Review > NIBP Review, then the NIBP Review window is displayed.

22.3.1 Scrolling the Screen


All measurement data can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen limitation. The
user can scroll up and down the screen manually to see measurement data that doesn’t fit in the
current view by selecting and pressing the symbol and displayed on the NIBP Review
interface.

22.3.2 Recording
The monitor can record the measurement data in the NIBP review window. For the detailed
information about recording the NIBP review, please refer to Chapter Recording.

22.4 Alarm Review


To review the alarm event, select the Alarm Review key on the screen or select Menu >
Review > Alarm Review, then the Alarm Review window is displayed.
NOTE:
The monitor can store a maximum of 200 alarm events. As soon as the alarm event
storage is full, the earliest alarm event will be replaced by the latest one.

22.4.1 Scrolling the Screen


All alarm events can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen limitation. The user
can scroll up and down the screen manually to see alarm events that don’t fit in the current view
by selecting and pressing the symbol and displayed on the Alarm Review interface.

22.4.2 Selecting Alarm Event of Specific Parameter


The monitor can review alarm event of the specific parameters. To view the alarm event of the
specific parameter, please select Menu > Review > Alarm Event and choose Event Type to
select the required parameter name from the popup list.

22.4.3 Setting Time Index


The user can set end time of alarm review by selecting the Time Index option displayed on the
alarm review interface.

- 161 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Review

If the user selects Current Time on the popup interface, the alarm events occurring before the
current time are displayed on the alarm event review interface.
If the user selects User Define, he can define the review time by setting time box displayed on
the interface. The alarm events occurring before the User Define option are displayed on the
alarm event review interface.

22.5 Arr Review


Select ECG Setup > Arr Analysis> Arr Review or Menu > Review > Arr Review to open the
Arr review interface. The interface displays the latest arrhythmia events.

22.5.1 Scrolling the Screen


All arrhythmia events can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen limitation. The
user can scroll up and down the screen manually to see the other arrhythmia events that do not fit
in the current view by selecting and pressing the symbol and displayed on the
Arrhythmia Review interface.

22.5.2 Arrhythmia Alarm Review


You may select an alarm event by the knob and access the alarm review interface to get more
information. On the alarm review interface, you can:
 Right or left shift the waveform to review the complete 8-scecond waveform.
 Select Record and output the arrhythmia waveform by the recorder.
 Select another name from the pull-down list of Rename for the arrhythmia event to change
its name.
 Select Delete to remove a specific arrhythmia event.
 Select Alarm List or exit the menu to get back to the arrhythmia review interface.

NOTE:
1 If there are more than 200 arrhythmia events, the monitor will only keep the recent
ones.
2 The name of arrhythmia event will be shown on the alarm status area.

- 162 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Review

22.6 12-lead Diagnosis Review


Select Menu > Review > Analysis Review to open the 12-lead analysis review interface.

22.6.1 Scrolling the Screen


All analysis results or waveforms can’t be displayed on the current screen due to the screen
limitation. The user can scroll up and down the screen manually to see the analysis results or
waveforms that do not fit in the current view by selecting and pressing the symbol and
displayed on the 12-lead analysis review interface.

22.6.2 Deleting Diagnosis Results


The user can delete the analysis results displayed on the current screen by selecting Delete on the
interface.

22.6.3 Switching Between Waveforms and Results


The user can review the analysis waveforms on the analysis result interface by selecting the
Wave option and review the analysis results on the analysis waveform interface by selecting the
Results option.

22.6.4 Recording
The monitor can record the 12-lead diagnosis waveforms or results displayed on the current
screen. To do so, press Record on the interface. For the detailed information about recording the
diagnosis waveforms or results, please refer to Chapter Recording.

- 163 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Calculation and Titration Table

Chapter 23 Calculation and Titration Table


The monitor provides calculation function and titration table. Calculations are patient data that
are not directly measured but calculated by the monitor.
The monitor can perform drug calculation. Hemodynamic calculation is not described in this
Instructions for Use. To perform one calculation, select Menu > Common Function > Drug
Dose.

NOTE:
The drug calculation function acts only as a calculator. The patient weights in Drug
Calculation menu and in Patient Information menu are independent of each other.
Therefore changing the Weight in Drug Calculation menu will not change the weight in
the Patient Information menu.

23.1 Drug Calculation


23.1.1 Calculation Procedures
1. The drug calculation window is displayed by selecting Menu > Common Function > Drug
Dose.
2. Select the right pull-down box of the Drug option and select the required drug name among
the 15 drugs which are listed as follows. And the drug name of Drug A, Drug B, Drug C,
Drug D and Drug E can be defined by the user.
 Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, Drug D and Drug E
 AMINOPHYLLINE
 DOBUTAMINE
 DOPAMINE
 EPINEPHRINE
 HEPARIN
 ISUPREL
 LIDOCAINE
 NIPRIDE
 NITROGLYCERIN
 PITOCIN
3. The system generates values that can’t be treated the calculation results. The user must enter
the correct parameter value based on the doctor’s instruction.
4. Manually enter the value of patient weight or directly obtain the value from the monitor by
selecting Get Info.
5. Enter the correct parameter value.
6. Confirm whether the calculation result is correct.

- 164 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Calculation and Titration Table

The following formulas are applied to dose calculation:


Concentrate = Amount / Volume
INF Rate = DOSE / Concentrate
Duration = Amount / Dose
Dose = Rate × Concentrate
DRIP Rate = INF Rate / 60 × DROP Size

23.1.2 Calculation Unit


Each drug has the fixed unit or unit series to calculate. Among the same unit series, the unit
binary varies with the entered parameter value.
The calculation units of the drugs are listed as follows:
Drug Unit
DRUG A, DRUG B, DRUG C, AMINOPHYLLINE, g, mg, mcg
DOBUTAMINE, DOPAMINE, EPINEPHRINE,
ISUPREL, LIDOCAINE, NIPRIDE, NITROGLYCERIN
DRUG D, PITOCIN, HEPARIN Ku, mu, Unit
DRUG E mEq

When defining a drug, select Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, Drug D, and Drug E based on the unit
series.
NOTE:
1 The drug calculation is displayed as invalid value before the user edits the drug name
and patient weight, and the user can’t enter any value.
2 Drip Rate and Drop Size are invalid in the neonatal mode.

23.1.3 Titration Table


After completing the drug calculation, the user can open the Titration on the Drug Dose
interface.
The user can change the following items in the titration table:
 Basic
 Step
 Dose Type
The data in the trend table will vary with the changes above. And the user can perform the
following:

 Scroll up and down the screen by selecting and pressing the symbol and displayed
on the trend graph.
 Record the data displayed in the current window by selecting Record.

- 165 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Calculation and Titration Table

23.2 Hemodynamic Calculation


23.2.1 Calculation Procedure
1. The hemodynamic calculation interface is displayed by selecting Menu > Common
Function > Hemodynamics.
2. Manually enter the values required on this interface. You can also directly obtain the
values of HR, C.O., PA MAP and CVP if they are available from the monitor by
selecting Get Info.
3. Select Calculate to output parameter value.

23.2.2 Input Parameters

Items English Full Name/Description


PAWP Pulmonary artery wedge pressure
CVP Central venous pressure
CO Cardiac output
HR Heart rate
LV_D Left Ventricular Diameter
AP MAP Mean Artery Pressure
PA MAP Pulmonary artery mean pressure
Height /
Weight /

23.2.3 Output Parameters

Items English Full Name/Description


CI Cardiac index
BSA Body surface area
SV Stroke volume
SVI Stroke volume index
SVR Systemic vascular resistance
SVRI Systemic vascular resistance index
PVR Pulmonary vascular resistance
PVRI Pulmonary vascular resistance index
LCW Left cardiac work
LCWI Left cardiac work index

- 166 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Calculation and Titration Table

RCW Right cardiac work


RCWI Right cardiac work index
LVSW Left ventricular stroke work
LVSWI Left ventricular stroke work index
RVSW Right ventricular stroke work
RVSWI Right ventricular stroke work index
EF Ejection fraction

- 167 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Recording

Chapter 24 Recording
A thermal dot matrix recorder is used for the monitor and can support many recording types and
output patient information, measurement data, review data waveform and so forth.

2
1

1 Recording indicator

2 Paper feeding key: press this key to start or stop feeding


recording paper without outputting anything on the paper

3 Paper outlet

4 Recorder door

24.1 Performance of the Recorder


 Waveform record is printed at the rate of 12.5mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s.
 48mm wide printout paper.
 It can record up to three waveforms.
 User-selectable real-time recording time and waveform.
 Auto recording interval is set by the user, and the waveform is in accordance with the real
time recording.
NOTE:
It is suggested that the user should not use the recorder when the low battery displays, or
the monitor may be turned off automatically.

- 168 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Recording

24.2 Starting and Stopping Recording


The monitor provides several types of stripe recording. You can start recording following the
procedure below:

Recording Type Description/ Procedure

Continuous real-time recording Press the Record button on the front panel to start the
recording.

8-second real-time recording A maximum of three waveforms can be selected on the


Recorder Setup menu and can be automatically recorded at
the interval preset via Record Interval on the Recorder
Setup menu. The runtime for each wave will be 8 seconds.

Trend graph recording Select Menu > Review > Trend Graph, click Record to
start recording.

Trend table recording Select Menu > Review > Trend Table, click Record to
start recording.

NIBP review recording Select Menu > Review > NIBP Review, click Record to
start recording.

Arrhythmia review recording Select Menu > Review > ARR Review, select one
arrhythmia alarm and click Record to start recording.

Alarm review recording Select Menu > Review > Alarm Review, select one alarm
and click Record to start recording.

Drug calculation titration Select Menu > Common Function > Drug Dose >
recording Titration, click Record to start recording.

Hemodynamic Calculation Select Menu > Common Function > Hemodynamics,


result recording click Record to start recording.

12-lead diagnosis recording Select ECG Setup > 12-L Review, click Record to start
recording.

C.O. measurement recording Select CO Option > CO Measure, click Record to start
recording.

Frozen waveform recording In the Freeze window, click Record to start recording.

To manually stop recording, click Record again in the related windows.


The recorder will automatically stop recording in the following situations:
 The recording task is finished.
 No paper in the recorder.
 Malfunction stops the recorder from running properly.

- 169 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Recording

NOTE:

You can also use the button on the front panel to manually start or stop recording.

24.3 Recorder Operations and Status Messages


24.3.1 Record Paper Requirement
Only standard thermosensitive record paper can be used: otherwise the recorder may not function,
the recording quality may be poor, and the thermosensitive print head may be damaged.

24.3.2 Proper Operation


■ When the recorder is working, the record paper goes out steadily. Do not pull the paper
outward with force: otherwise the recorder may be damaged.
■ Do not operate the recorder without record paper.

24.3.3 Paper Out


When the Recorder Out OF Paper alarm is displayed, the recorder cannot start. Please insert
record paper properly.

24.3.4 Replacing Paper


1. Pull outwards the upper arc part of the recorder casing to release the casing, shown in the
following figure.

2. Insert a new roll of paper into the paper cassette, printing side facing upwards.

- 170 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Recording

3. Ensure proper position and tidy margin.

4. Pull about 2cm of the paper out, and close the recorder casing.

NOTE:
Be careful when inserting papers. Avoid damaging the thermo-sensitive print head.
Unless when inserting papers or shooting troubles, do not leave the recorder catch open.

24.3.5 Removing Paper Jam


When the recorder functions or sounds improperly, you should open the recorder casing to check
for a paper jam. Remove the paper jam in the following way:
■ Cut the record paper from the feeding edge.
■ Open the recorder casing.
■ Re-insert the paper.

- 171 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Recording

NOTE:
1. If the monitor is not installed with a recorder, it will indicate RECORDER SETUP
NEEDED after pressing the Record button.
2. Do not touch the thermo-sensitive print head when performing continuous recording.

- 172 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Printing Patient Reports

Chapter 25 Printing Patient Reports


Patient reports can be printed out by an HP series laser printer connected with the monitor.
NOTE:
Use the printer HP Laser Jet P2055dn which is tested to be compatible with the monitor.

25.1 Printer Settings


You can configure the printer settings on the monitor before printing out patient reports. Click the

shortcut key or select Menu > System Setup > Printer Setup, and you can
 Assign a locally networked printer by selecting it from the Printer list.
 Search all available printers networked with the monitor by clicking Search Printer.
 Enable or disable double side printing by setting DoubleSide Print to On or Off.
The reports will be printed out on A4 paper and with single side by default.
NOTE:
1 You need to search all available printers on the local network for the first time you
use a networked printer.
2 Make sure the IP of the printer and the IP of the monitor share the same network
segment.
3 Do not click Search Printer during printing patient reports, or the printer might stop
the current print job.
4 When a printer simultaneously received print jobs from several networked monitors,
a print job conflict may occur. Check the use status of the monitors and the printers
on the same network prior to use and avoid print job conflicts.
5 Make sure there is no lack of paper before printing patient reports, or the alarm
Printer Unavailable will be triggered.

25.2 Starting and Stopping Report Printing


You can print out ten types of patient reports following the procedure below:
Report Type Procedure
Trend graph report In the Trend Graph window, click Print to start printing.
Trend table report In the Trend Table window, click Print to start printing.
Alarm waveform report In the Alarm Review window, click Print to start printing.
NIBP review report In the NIBP Review window, click Print to start printing.
Arrhythmia review report In the ARR Review window, click Print to start printing.

- 173 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Printing Patient Reports

Report Type Procedure


12-lead diagnosis report In the Diagnosis Review window, click Print to start
printing.
12-lead diagnosis waveform In the 12-Lead Diagnosis Waveform Review window,
report click Print to start printing.
Drug calculation titration report In the Titration window, click Print to start printing.
C.O. measurement report In the CO Measure window, click Print to start printing.
Hemodynamics report In the Hemodynamics window, click Print to start
printing.

To stop the current print job, click Stop Printing in the windows mentioned above.

NOTE:
You can only start one print job at a time. Before starting a new print job, you have to stop
the current print job or wait until the current print job is completed.

- 174 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Other Functions

Chapter 26 Other Functions

26.1 Nurse Call


The monitor provides dedicated nurse call port which is connected to nurse call system through
the nurse call cable to perform the nurse call function.
NOTE:
Before using the function of nurse call, check if it is functioning normally.

26.2 Wireless Network


The monitor can be equipped with wireless net card and constructs wireless network through AP
(Access Point). Our company arranges the qualified engineers to install and set the wireless
network for the user and test the corresponding performance. For details, please refer to Patient
Monitor Wireless Network Installation Guide.
NOTE:
1 Be aware that some network-based functions may be limited for monitors on wireless
networks in comparison with those on wired networks.
2 The obstacle may interfere with data transmission and even cause data loss.
3 To make the change of the Bed No. effective when the monitor has been connected to
a wireless network, you need to disconnect the wireless connection and then connect
it again or reboot the monitor.

26.3 Storing Data in a Removable Device


26.3.1 Data Stored in the Removable Device
A single piece of patient data maximally contains the following information:

Patient information MRN, name, date of birth, date of admission, gender, type,
height, weight, blood type, pace, doctor, bed No., department

Trend graph and trend table a maximum of 10 days

NIBP measurement review 1200 sets

Alarm review 60 sets

Arrhythmia event 60 sets

12-lead diagnosis review 50 sets

Waveforms 48 hours

- 175 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Other Functions

26.3.2 Activating/ Deactivating Data Storing


To activate/ deactivate the data storing function, select Menu> Maintenance> User Maintain >
Other Setups, and set Data Store to On/ Off.
The monitor will stop storing data in the removable device under the following circumstances:
 The removable device is unplugged.
 There is no enough space in the removable device for storing data.
 The removable device is read-only.
 The data storing function is deactivated.
 The monitor is switched off.
 The power supply is off.

26.3.3 Selecting a Removable Device


You may plug several removable devices into the monitor at the same time, but only one is
operative. You can select a removable device as a working one among the plugging devices by
selecting Menu> Removable Device and choosing the device name from the list. By default, the
first plugged removable device is the working one.

CAUTION
1 Not all the removable devices are compatible with the monitor, Use the removable
devices recommended by the manufacturer.
2 DO not set the read-only switch on the removable device to on when the removable
device is inserted in the monitor.

26.3.4 Reviewing Data Stored in a Removable Device


To review data stored in a removable device, select Menu> Review> External Data, and choose
a patient from the list to review the data including patient information, trend graph, trend table,
NIBP measurements, arrhythmia event, alarm event, 12-lead diagnosis and waveform.

26.3.5 Deleting Data Stored in a Removable Device


To delete data of one patient, choose the patient from the list after selecting Menu> Review>
External Data, and then click Delete Data on the Review menu. Further confirmation of
deletion is required.
To delete data of all patients, select Menu> Review> External Data and click Delete all data on
the External Data Review menu. Further confirmation is required.

- 176 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Other Functions

26.3.6 Ejecting a Removable Device


Before unplugging a removable device from the monitor, you need to select Menu> Removable
Device and click Eject to uninstall the removable device.

CAUTION
Do not remove the removable device without ejecting it during data storing, or the
removable device might be damaged.

- 177 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Using Battery

Chapter 27 Using Battery


This monitor can run on battery power, which ensures its uninterrupted operation even when AC
power supply is interrupted. The batteries recharge whenever the monitor is connected to the AC
power source. During monitoring, if the AC power is interrupted, the monitor will take power
from the internal batteries. If the monitor is powered by batteries, the monitor will switch off
automatically before the batteries are completely depleted.

27.1 Battery Safety Information


WARNING
1 Before using the rechargeable lithium-ion batteries (hereinafter called batteries), be
sure to read the user manual and safety precautions thoroughly.
2 The service life of the batteries depends on the service frequency and time. The
service life of the batteries is about three years if the batteries are well maintained and
stored. The service life of the batteries may shorten if they are used inappropriately.
3 Do not connect the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals with metal objects, and do
not put the batteries together with metal objects, which can result in short circuits.
4 Do not unplug the batteries when monitoring.
5 Do not heat or throw the batteries into a fire.
6 Do not use, leave the batteries close to fire or other places where temperature may be
above 60C.
7 Do not immerse, throw, or wet the batteries in water/seawater.
8 Do not destroy the batteries: do not pierce the batteries with a sharp object such as a
needle; do not hit with a hammer, step on or throw or drop to cause strong shock; do
not disassemble or modify the batteries.
9 Use the batteries only in the monitor. Do not solder the leading wire and the battery
terminal directly.
10 If liquid leaking from the batteries gets into your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Wash
them well with clean water and go to see a doctor immediately. If liquid leaks of the
batteries splash onto your skin or clothes, wash well with fresh water immediately.
11 Keep away from fire immediately when leakage or foul odor is detected.
12 Stop using the batteries if abnormal heat, odor, discoloration, deformation or
abnormal condition is detected during use, charge, or storage. Keep it away from the
monitor.
13 Do not use a battery with serious scar or deformation.

- 178 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Using Battery

WARNING
14 Use the batteries with similar performance, which can extend the service life of the
batteries. If one of the two batteries is malfunctioning, it is recommended to change
both of the two batteries.
15 When the monitor is running on battery power, do not replace the batteries during
monitoring patients; or the monitor will be powered off, which may result in patient
injury.

27.2 Battery Power Indicator


The indicator labeled Battery on the front panel of the monitor illuminates in green when the
monitor is battery powered and illuminates in yellow when battery is being charged. The
indicator is not illuminated when the monitor is not powered or when AC power is applied.

27.3 Battery Status on the Main Screen


Battery status symbols show the status of each battery detected and the combined battery power
remaining; also, they tell you which battery compartments they are in, either 1 or 2.

The battery is in compartment 1.

The battery is in compartment 2.

Remaining battery power: 100%.

Remaining battery power: 75%

Remaining battery power: 50%

Remaining battery power: 25%

Batteries are almost depleted and need to recharge immediately.

No battery is installed.

27.4 Checking Battery Performance


The performance of rechargeable batteries may deteriorate over time. Battery maintenance as
recommended here can help to slow down this process.
1. Disconnect the patient from the monitor and stop all monitoring and measurement.
2. Switch the monitor power on and charge the battery for more than 6 hours continuously.

- 179 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Using Battery

3. Disconnect monitor from mains power and let the monitor run until there is no battery power
left and the monitor shuts off.
4. The running time of the battery reflects the battery performance.
If the running time is obviously less than the specified time in the specification, please change the
battery or contact the service personnel.

27.5 Replacing the Battery


To install or replace the battery, please follow the procedure:

Battery door

1. To open the battery door, press the battery compartment latch and pull the battery door
leftwards according to indication beside the button.
2. Remove the battery from the compartment.
3. Insert a new battery into the battery compartment.
4. Close the battery door.
NOTE:
The markers which respectively indicate compartment 1 and compartment 2 on the
battery door are corresponding to the symbols and on the main screen.

27.6 Recycling the Battery


When the battery no longer holds a charge, it should be replaced. Remove the old battery from
the monitor and recycle it properly.

WARNING
Do not disassemble batteries, put them into fire or cause them to short circuit. They may
ignite, explode or leak, causing personal injury.

- 180 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Using Battery

27.7 Maintaining the Battery


To prolong the life of the batteries, there is current limitation for using batteries. Therefore, the
monitor which runs on battery power may not be powered on under following circumstances:
1. Only one battery is installed.
2. One of the two installed batteries is damaged, or large capacity difference between the two
installed batteries exists.
3. Batteries in the monitor are almost empty.
If above-mentioned circumstances are detected, recharge the batteries or use another two batteries
with similar capacity.
Batteries should be conditioned regularly to maintain their useful life.
Remove the batteries from the monitor if they are not used for a longer period of time. And
recharge the batteries at a minimum of every 6 months when they are stored.
Discharge the battery completely once every month.

- 181 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Care and Cleaning

Chapter 28 Care and Cleaning


Only use the substances approved by the manufacturer and methods listed in this chapter to clean
or disinfect your equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by using unapproved
substances or methods.
The manufacturer makes no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a
means for controlling infection. Consult your hospital’s Infection Control Officer or
Epidemiologist for control infection.

28.1 General Points


Keep your monitor, cables and accessories free of dust and dirt. To prevent the device from
damage, please follow the procedure:
 Always dilute according to the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible
concentration.
 Do not immerse any part of the equipment or any accessories in liquid.
 Do not pour liquid onto the system.
 Never use bleach.
 Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
 Never use abrasive material (such as steel wool or silver polish).

CAUTION
If you spill liquid on the equipment, battery, or accessories, or they are accidentally
immersed in liquid, contact your service personnel or the manufacturer’s service
engineer.

28.2 Cleaning
WARNING
Before cleaning the monitor or the sensor, make sure that the equipment is switched off
and disconnected from the power line.

28.2.1 Cleaning the Monitor


To surface-clean the monitor, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the monitor and disconnect it from the power line.
2. Clean the display screen using a soft, clean cloth dampened with the cleaning solution.
3. Clean the exterior surface of the equipment using a soft cloth dampened with the cleaning
solution.

- 182 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Care and Cleaning

4. Wipe off the cleaning solution with a dry cloth after cleaning if necessary.
5. Dry the monitor in a ventilated and cool place.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%;
■ Isopropanol 70%;

28.2.2 Cleaning the Accessories


28.2.2.1 Cleaning the ECG Cables and Lead Wires
NOTE:
1. Use only recommended cleaning substances and disinfectants listed in this document.
Others may cause damage (not covered by warranty), reduce product lifetime or
cause safety hazards.
2. Keep the cable and lead wires free of dust and dirt.
3. Never immerse or soak the ECG cable.
4. Inspect the cables after cleaning.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%
■ Isopropanol 70%

28.2.2.2 Cleaning the Blood Pressure Cuff


If the cover requires more rigorous cleaning, remove the air bladder first. Allow the cover to
thoroughly air dry before use.
Cuffs have been tested to withstand the following recommended disinfectants: isopropanol 70%,
ethanol 75%.

28.2.2.3 Cleaning the SpO2 Sensor


These reusable sensors should be cleaned and disinfected. To clean the sensor, follow these steps:
1. Wipe all surfaces of the sensor using a soft cloth dampened with the cleaning solution.
2. Wipe off the cleaning solution with a dry cloth after cleaning if necessary.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%
■ Isopropanol 70%

- 183 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Care and Cleaning

28.2.2.4 Cleaning the IBP/C.O. Cables


NOTE:
1. Keep the cable free of dust and dirt.
2. Never immerse or soak the cable.
3. Inspect the cables after cleaning.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%
■ Isopropanol 70%

28.2.2.5 Cleaning the TEMP Sensor


Recommended cleaning agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%
■ Isopropanol 70%

28.2.2.6 Other Accessories


For cleaning other accessories, please refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for details.

28.3 Disinfection
To avoid extended damage to the equipment, disinfection is only recommended when stipulated
as necessary in the hospital’s policy. Disinfection facilities should be cleaned first.
Recommended types of disinfecting agents are:
■ Ethanol 75%
■ Isopropanol 70%

WARNING
The monitor and reusable accessories shall be disinfected to avoid patient cross
infection.

- 184 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Maintenance

Chapter 29 Maintenance
WARNING
1 Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution employing the
use of this equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause
undue equipment failure and possible health hazards.
2 If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel,
or your authorized supplier.

29.1 Inspecting
The overall check of the monitor, including the safety check, should be performed only by
qualified personnel every 24 months, and each time after fix up.
The following items should be checked:
 If the environment condition and power supply meet requirement.
 If the power supply cord has damage and insulativity meets requirement.
 If the device and accessories have damage.
 Specified accessories.
 If the alarm system can work properly.
 If the recorder can work properly and the paper meets the requirement.
 Battery performance
 If all monitoring functions are in good conditions.
 If the grounding resistance and leakage current meet requirement.
If any damage or abnormality is found, please don’t use the monitor and contact local Customer
Service Center.

29.2 Maintenance Task and Test Schedule


The following tasks are for qualified service professionals of the manufacturer only. Contact a
qualified service provider of the manufacturer if your monitor needs a safety or performance test.
Clean and disinfect equipment to decontaminate it before testing or maintaining it.
Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency
Safety checks. Selected tests on At least once every two years, or as needed, after any
the basis of IEC60601-1 repairs where the power supply is removed or replaced,
or if the monitor has been dropped.
Check ECG synchronization of the At least once every two years, or as needed.
monitor and defibrillator

- 185 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Maintenance

Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency


NIBP Leakage Inspection At least once every two years, or as specified by local
laws.
NIBP Pressure Calibration At least once every two years, or as specified by local
laws.
NIBP Calibration At least once every two years, or as specified by local
laws.
AG Calibration If you suspect the measurement values are incorrect and
need to calibrate, please contact the manufacturer.

- 186 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Warranty and Service

Chapter 30 Warranty and Service


30.1 Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that the manufacturer’s products meet the labeled specifications of the
products and will be free from defects in materials and workmanship that occur within warranty
period.
The warranty is void in cases of:
a) damage caused by mishandling during shipping.
b) subsequent damage caused by improper use or maintenance.
c) damage caused by alteration or repair by anyone not authorized by the manufacturer.
d) damage caused by accidents.
e) replacement or removal of serial number label and manufacture label.
If a product covered by this warranty is determined to be defective because of defective materials,
components, or workmanship, and the warranty claim is made within the warranty period, the
manufacturer will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective part(s) free of charge. The
manufacturer will not provide a substitute product for use when the defective product is being
repaired.

30.2 Contact information


If you have any question about maintenance, technical specifications or malfunctions of devices,
contact your local distributor.

- 187 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Chapter 31 Accessories
You can order accessories from the manufacturer’s supplies or consult your local representative
of the manufacturer for details.

WARNING
1 Never reuse disposable transducers, sensors, accessories and their casing that are
intended for single use; or only use them on a single patient. Reuse may compromise
device functionality and system performance and cause a potential hazard.
2 Only use the accessories approved by the manufacturer. Using accessories not
approved by the manufacturer may compromise device functionality and system
performance and cause a potential hazard. It is not recommended to use accessories
supplied by the manufacturer with patient monitors by other manufacturers.
3 Do not use a sterilized accessory if its casing is damaged.

NOTE:
Transducers and sensors have a limited shelf life. Refer to the package labeling.

The following cables may not all be available in all countries. Please check availability with your
local supplier of the manufacturer.

31.1 ECG Accessories


Part Number Accessories

01.57.471226 ECG trunk cable, 5-lead, 12pin, ESU, AHA/IEC, 2.7m, reusable
01.57.471227 ECG trunk cable, 5-lead, 12pin, ESU, AHA/IEC, 5.0m, reusable
01.57.471228 ECG trunk cable, 5-lead, 12pin, Defib, AHA/IEC, 2.7m, reusable
01.57.471229 ECG trunk cable, 5-lead, 12pin, Defib, AHA/IEC, 5.0m, reusable
01.13.036620 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, clip, AHA, 1.0m&1.6m, reusable
01.13.036621 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, clip, AHA, 1.0m, reusable
01.13.036622 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, snap, AHA, 1.0&1.6m, reusable
01.13.036623 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, snap, AHA, 1.0m, reusable
01.13.036624 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, clip, IEC, 1.0m&1.6m, reusable
01.13.036625 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, clip, IEC, 1.0m, reusable
01.13.036626 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, snap, IEC, 1.0&1.6m, reusable
01.13.036627 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, snap, IEC, 1.0m, reusable
01.57.471072 ECG trunk cable, 10-lead, Defibrillator-Proof, AHA, 2.6m, reusable

- 188 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Part Number Accessories

01.57.471168 ECG trunk cable, 10-lead, Defibrillator-Proof, IEC, 2.6m, reusable

01.57.109101 ECG limb wires, 10-lead, snap, AHA, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.040203 ECG limb wires, 10-lead, snap, IEC, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.471169 ECG limb wires, 10-lead, clip, AHA, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.471163 ECG limb wires, 10-lead, clip, IEC, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.471164 ECG trunk cable, 3-lead, Defibrillator-Proof, AHA, 2.6m, reusable

01.57.471171 ECG trunk cable, 3-lead, Defibrillator-Proof, IEC, 2.6m, reusable

01.57.471165 ECG limb cable, 3-lead, clip, AHA, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.471025 ECG limb cable, 3-lead, clip, IEC, 0.9m, reusable

01.57.471276 ECG CONDUCTIVE ADHESIVE ELECTRODES, TYCO


KENDALL MEDI TRACE 210, 10PCS/package

Adult Disposable Adhesive Electrodes, TYCO H99SG,30PCS/


01.57.471056
package, CE

Adult Disposable Adhesive Electrodes, TYCO Medi-Trace 200,


01.57.471060
100PCS/ package, FDA

Children/ Neonatal Disposable Adhesive Electrodes, TYCO H124SG,


01.57.471057
50PCS/package,CE

ECG trunk cable, 3-lead,12pin, Defibrillator-Proof,


01.57.471194
AHA/IEC,2.9m,DIN,reusable

01.57.471195 ECG limb cable, 3-lead, snap, IEC, 0.63m, DIN, reusable

01.57.471196 ECG limb cable, 3-lead, snap, AHA, 0.63m, DIN, reusable

01.57.471197 ECG limb cable, 3-lead,clip,IEC,0.63m,DIN,reusable

01.57.471198 ECG limb cable, 3-lead,clip,AHA,0.63m,DIN,reusable

- 189 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

31.2 SpO2 Accessories


Part Number Accessories
For the manufacturer’s Module
SH1 Adult Reusable SpO2 Sensor (DB9) (Only compatible with the
02.01.210120 manufacturer’s SpO2 module and SpO2 Extension cable ), 1m (finger
type, patient size>40kg)
SH3 Neonate Warp SpO2 Sensor (DB9) (Only compatible with the
02.01.110492
manufacturer’s SpO2 module and SpO2 Extension cable),1m
SH4 Adult Silicone Soft-tip SpO2 Sensor (DB9) (Immersion
02.01.210122 Disinfection) (Only compatible with the manufacturer’s SpO2 module
and SpO2 Extension cable), 1m (finger type, patient size>50kg)
SH5 pediatric Silicone Soft-tip SpO2 Sensor (DB9) (Only compatible
02.01.210121 with the manufacturer’s SpO2 module and SpO2 Extension cable), 1m
(finger type, patient size: 10kg to 50kg)
01.57.471068 SpO2 Extension cable(DB9 to 7pin, 2m, TPU)
Adult Single-Patient SpO2 sensor SHD-A (forefinger, for patients
01.57.471235
over 30kg)
Pediatrics Single-Patient SpO2 sensor SHD-P (forefinger, for patients
01.57.471236
between 10kg to 50kg)
Infant Single-Patient SpO2 sensor SHD-I (big toe, for patients
01.57.471237
between 3kg to 20kg)
Neonate Single-Patient SpO2 sensor SHD-N (foot, for patients less
01.57.471238
than 3kg)
For Nellcor Module
Nellcor Reusable Adult SpO2 Sensor (DS-100A OxiMax) (forefinger,
01.15.30043
for patient over 30kg)
Nellcor Reusable Adult/Neonate SpO2 Sensor (OXI-A/N OxiMax)
11.15.40096
(forefinger or foot)
Nellcor SpO2 Extension cable (Compatible with Nellcor OXI-Max
01.57.471069
SpO2 module and Nellcor sensor)

31.3 NIBP Accessories


Part Number Accessories

For the manufacturer’s Module


01.57.471157 NIBP cuff, neonatal #1, 3-6cm, for single patient use
01.57.471158 NIBP cuff, neonatal #2, 4-8cm, for single patient use
01.57.471159 NIBP cuff, neonatal #3, 6-11cm, for single patient use
01.57.471160 NIBP cuff, neonatal #4, 7-13cm, for single patient use
01.57.471161 NIBP cuff, neonatal #5, 8-15cm, for single patient use

- 190 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Part Number Accessories


01.57.471326 Reusable blood pressure cuff, infant, E5
01.57.471327 Reusable blood pressure cuff, small, child, E6
01.57.471328 Reusable blood pressure cuff, child, E7
01.57.471329 Reusable blood pressure cuff, small, adult, E8
01.57.471330 Reusable blood pressure cuff, adult, E9
01.57.471331 Reusable blood pressure cuff, large, adult, E10
01.59.473007 NIBP Tube (3m) with connector
01.57.471323 NIBP cuff, neonatal, 10cm-15cm, reusable
01.57.471324 NIBP cuff, neonatal, 6cm-11cm, reusable
01.59.473006 NIBP tube for neonatal cuff (only compatible with neonatal cuff)
For Omron Module*

01.59.102099 OMRON NIBP Tube (3.5m) /CUFF HOSE(NO.1)length3.5m, CE


OMRON HXA-GCUFF-SSLA, adult/pediatric, arm circumference
01.57.471457
limit: 12 -18cm, reusable, CE
OMRON HXA-GCUFF-SLA, adult/pediatric, arm circumference
01.57.471458
limit: 17 -22cm, reusable, CE
OMRON HXA-GCUFF-MLA, adult/pediatric, arm circumference
01.57.471459
limit: 22 -32cm, reusable, CE
OMRON HXA-GCUFF-LLA, adult/pediatric, arm circumference
01.57.471460
limit: 32 -42cm, reusable, CE
OMRON neonatal disposable cuff/ cuff (NO.10) arm 3.5-6cm, width
01.57.471081
2.5cm, CE
OMRON neonatal disposable cuff/ cuff (NO.11) arm5-7.5cm, width
01.57.471082
3cm, CE
OMRON neonatal disposable cuff / cuff (NO.12) arm7.5-10.5cm,
01.57.471083
width 4cm, CE
OMRON neonatal disposable cuff/ cuff (NO.13) arm 8.5-13cm, width
01.57.471084
5cm, CE
Connecting tube for neonatal cuff (only compatible with neonatal
01.59.473003
disposable and NIBP tube)/ cuff hose (NO.3) length 3.5m, CE
*Not available in the U.S.A.

31.4 Temp Accessories


Part Number Accessories
01.15.040253 2pin Neonatal/pediatric Skin Temperature Probe (2.252K)
01.15.040254 2pin Neonatal/pediatric Rectal / Oral Temperature Probe (2.252K)
01.15.040255 2pin Neonatal/pediatric Skin Temperature Probe (10K)
01.15.040256 2pin Neonatal/pediatric Rectal / Oral Temperature Probe (10K)

- 191 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Part Number Accessories


01.15.040226 2P Skin Temperature Probe(2.252K)
01.15.040227 2P Rectal / Oral Temperature Probe(2.252K)
01.15.040225 2P Skin Temperature Probe(10K)
01.15.040228 2P Rectal / Oral Temperature Probe(10K)

31.5 IBP Accessories


Part Number Accessories
01.57.471070 Pressure transducer interface cable, BD
01.57.471172 Pressure transducer interface cable, EDWARD
01.57.471173 Pressure transducer interface cable, HOSPIRA
01.57.471166 Pressure transducer interface cable, UTAH
Disposable pressure transducer kit (BD DTX TM Plus DT-4812
11.57.40121
682000)
12Pin ICP transducer interface cable (compatible with Gaeltec ICT/B
01.57.471281
intracranial pressure transducer)

31.6 CO2 Accessories


Part Number Accessories
For the manufacturer’s Module
02.01.210520 Dewatering cup (single patient use, adult/ pediatric 10ml)
01.57.471275 CO2 sampling line with male Luer lock, 2.0m
01.57.471282 All purpose sampling cannula without filter (non sterile), size: adult
01.57.471283 All purpose sampling cannula without filter (non sterile), size: infant
01.57.471284 All purpose sampling cannula without filter (non sterile), size: neonate
01.57.471285 Duo flow O2+CO2 sampling cannula (non sterile), size: adult
01.57.471286 Duo flow O2+CO2 sampling cannula (non sterile), size: child
01.57.471287 Capnomask O2+CO2 sampling cannula (non sterile), size: adult
01.57.471288 Capnomask O2+CO2 sampling cannula (non sterile), size: child
For Respironics Module
01.57.471085 CO2 module extension cable
12.08.078166 LoFloTM module mounting bracket (Respironics 1027730)
11.57.078139 Disposable CO2 nasal cannula, adult (Respironics 3468ADU-00)
11.57.078151 Adult/ pediatric airway adapter kit with dehumidification tubing

- 192 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Part Number Accessories


Disposable sampling line kit with dehumidification tubing (Respironics
11.57.078154
3475-00)
11.57.471019 Reuseable adult/ pediatric airway adapter (7007-01)
11.57.471020 Reuseable neonate/ infant airway adapter (7053-01)
11.59.078155 Disposable adult airway adapter (6063-00)
11.59.078156 Disposable neonatal (infant/ pediatric) airway adapter (6312-00)
11.57.078142 Adult nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
11.57.078143 Pediatric nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
11.57.078144 Infant nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
11.57.101019 Adult nasal/ oral CO2 sampling cannula
11.57.101020 Pediatric nasal/ oral CO2 sampling cannula
11.57.101021 Adult nasal/ oral CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
01.12.031598 Adult/ pediatric airway adapter kit
11.57.078140 Disposable CO2 nasal cannula, pediatric (Respironics 3468PED-00)
11.57.078141 Disposable CO2 nasal cannula, infant (Respironics 3468INF-00)
11.57.078152 Pediatric/ infant airway adapter kit with dehumidification tubing
11.57.078158 Pediatric mask/ mainstream 9960PED-00
11.57.078159 Adult standard mask/ mainstream 9960STD-00
11.57.078160 Adult large mask/ mainstream 9960STD-00
11.57.078161 Band/ mainstream 8751-00
11.12.078162 bayonet socket
11.15.040143 Respironics CAPNOSTAT 5 EtCO2 (mainstream) module

31.7 C.O. Accessories


Part Number Accessories
01.57.471071 Cardiac output cable
11.13.40119 In-line injection temperature probe (BD 684056-SP4042)
11.57.40120 In-line injection temperature probe housing (BD 680006-SP5045)
11.57.100175 Control syringe (Medex MA387)

31.8 AG Accessories
Part Number Accessories
01.57.471086 GAS module extension cable
12.08.208006 IRMA™ mainstream analyzers, IRMA AX+, CAT.NO.200601 (CO2,
N2O, 5AA, AAID)

- 193 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

Part Number Accessories


11.57.471043 Nomoline with Luer lock connector, 25pieces/ box, CAT.NO. 108210
11.57.471042 IRMA airway adapter, adult/ pediatric, 25pieces/box, CAT.NO. 106220
01.57.471189 Nomoline adapter Cat no: 108220, sampling line with female Luer lock
connector, adult/ pediatric/ infant, 0.15 m.
01.57.471190 Nomoline airway adapter set. Cat no: 108230, sampling line with
straight airway adapter, single-patient use, adult/ pediatric, 2.0 m
01.57.471191 Nomo extension Cat no: 108240, sampling line with male Luer lock
connector, 2.0m, connects to Nomoline adapter, Cat no 108220,
multi-patient use.
01.57.471192 T-adapter Cat no: 108250, airway adapter with female Luer lock
connector, adult/ pediatric, connects to Nomoline Cat no 108210 and
Nomo extension, Cat no 108240

31.9 BIS Accessories*


Part Number Accessories
11.57.471318 BIS™ Quatro sensor
11.57.471319 BIS™ Extend sensor
11.57.471320 BIS™ Pediatric sensor
01.13.036652 BISx adapter cable
11.57.471317 BISx device
*Not available in the U.S.A.

31.10 RM Accessories*
Part Number Accessories
01.57.471239 Pediatric/adult flow sensor, color: clear
01.57.471240 Neonatal flow sensor, color: purple
01.57.471241 Pediatric/adult combined CO2/ flow sensor, color: clear
01.57.471242 Pediatric combined CO2/ flow sensor, color: green
01.57.471243 Neonatal combined CO2/ flow sensor, color: purple
*Not available in the U.S.A.

31.11 ICG Accessories*


Part Number Accessories
01.57.471333 ICG patient cable
01.57.471334 ICG electrodes
*Not available in the U.S.A.

- 194 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Accessories

31.12 Other Accessories


Part Number Accessories
22.08.208017 XM module
22.08.208020 V-CO2 module (sidestream, Respironics)
22.08.208021 V-CO2 module (mainstream, Respironics)
03.48.348002 V-CO2 module (sidestream)
22.08.208022 V-AG module (sidestream)
22.08.208023 V-AG module (mainstream)
22.08.208029 V-C.O. module
22.08.208030 Parameter amplifier mainframe
22.08.208031 V-IBP module
22.08.208051 V-SpO2 module (Nellcor Module)
22.01.210627 V-NIBP module (Omron Module)*
22.08.208073 V-BIS module*
03.48.348003 V-RM module*
03.48.348001 V-ICG module*
01.57.78035 Recording paper
11.13.01950 Power cable
01.13.36014 Power Cable(IEC Standard) 220V
11.13.036106 Power Cable(AHA Standard)
01.21.064143 Rechargeable Lithium-Ion battery (14.8V, 4.2Ah)
11.13.114214 SE-1 ground cable
01.18.052268 Netac USB flash disk (U208, 8G)
*Not available in the U.S.A.

- 195 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A Product Specifications
A.1 Classification
Anti-electroshock Type Class I equipment and internal powered equipment
Anti-electroshock Degree ECG, RESP, TEMP, IBP, C.O. CF
SpO2, NIBP, CO2, AG, BIS, RM, ICG BF
Ingress Protection IPX1 (protected against vertically falling water drops)
Working System Continuous operation equipment
Compliant with Standards IEC 60601-1: 1988+A1: 1991+A2: 1995; EN 60601-1:
1990+A1: 1993+A2: 1995; IEC 60601-1-2: 2001+A1:
2004; EN 60601-1-2: 2001+A1: 2006; IEC/EN
60601-2-25; IEC/EN 60601-2-27; IEC/EN 60601-2-51;
ANSI/AAMI EC13; IEC/EN 60601-2-30; EN 1060-1; EN
1060-3; EN 1060-4; ANSI/AAMI/ISO 81060-2; ISO
9919; EN 12470-4; IEC/EN 60601-2-34; ISO 21647;
IEC/EN 60601-2-49; IEC 60601-2-26

A.2 Physical Specifications


Max Comments
Product Dimension
Weight
PM-2000M 425 mm (L) × 245 mm (W)× 384 mm (H) <14 kg Including
batteries, XM
module and
recorder,
without
options
XM module 188 mm (L) × 87.5 mm (W)× 120 mm (H) <1 kg Without
accessories
V-IBP module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
accessories
V-C.O. module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
accessories

- 196 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Max Comments
Product Dimension
Weight
V-CO2 module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
(mainstream, accessories
Respironics)
V-CO2 module 134 mm (L) × 86 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.65 kg Without
(sidestream, accessories
Respironics)
V-CO2 module 134 mm (L) × 86 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.65 kg Without
(sidestream, the accessories
manufacturer’s)
V-AG module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
(mainstream) accessories
V-AG module 134 mm (L) × 86 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.65 kg Without
(sidestream) accessories
V-SpO2 module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
accessories
V-NIBP module 134 mm (L) × 86 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.65 kg Without
accessories
V-BIS module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.2 kg Without
accessories
V-RM module 134 mm (L) × 86 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.65 kg Without
accessories
V-ICG module 134 mm (L) × 43 mm (W)× 104 mm (H) <0.3 kg Without
accessories
PAM 503 mm (L) × 169 mm (W)× 148 mm (H) <2.5 kg Without
accessories

- 197 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.3 Environmental Specifications


The monitor may not meet the performance specifications given here if stored or used outside the
specified temperature and humidity ranges.
When the monitor and related products have differing environmental specifications, the effective
range for the combined products is that range which is common to the specifications for all
products.
Main unit, PAM, XM module, V-SpO2 module, V-IBP module, V-C.O. module, V-BIS
module, V-ICG module, V-CO2 module (sidestream, the manufacturer’s), Recorder
Temperature
Working +0C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 15% to 95% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 15% to 95% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 860hPa to 1060hPa
Transport and Storage 700hPa to 1060hPa

V-CO2 module (sidestream, Respironics)


Temperature
Working +5C to +35C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 10% to 90% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 90% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 530hPa to 1066hPa
Transport and Storage 530hPa to 1066hPa

- 198 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

V-CO2 module (mainstream, Respironics)


Temperature
Working +0C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 10% to 90% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 90% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 530hPa to 1066hPa
Transport and Storage 530hPa to 1066hPa

V-AG module (sidestream)


Temperature
Working +5C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 10% to 95% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 95% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 525hPa to 1200hPa
Transport and Storage 500hPa to 1200hPa

V-AG module (mainstream)


Temperature
Working +10C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 10% to 95% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 95% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 525hPa to 1200hPa

- 199 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Transport and Storage 500hPa to 1200hPa

V-NIBP module (Omron Module)


Temperature
Working 0C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 95% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 700hPa to 1060hPa
Transport and Storage 500hPa to 1060hPa

V-RM module
Temperature
Working +10C to +40C
Transport and Storage -20C to +55C
Humidity
Working 10% to 95% (non-condensing)

Transport and Storage 10% to 95% (non-condensing)


Altitude
Working 533hPa to 1066hPa
Transport and Storage 533hPa to 1066hPa

A.4 Power Supply


Line Voltage 100V to 240V~
Current 1.8A to 0.75A
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz
Fuse T3.15AH250VP

- 200 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.5 Battery
Quantity 2
Capacity 4200mAh
Operating Time ≥120 min with 2 new, fully charged batteries, at 25C,
(continuous SpO2 measurement and NIBP automatic
measurement mode at interval of 15 minutes,
ECG/TEMP module connected, recording at interval
of 10 minutes, brightness set to “1”)
≥90 min with 2 new, fully charged batteries, at 25C,
(continuous SpO2 measurement and NIBP automatic
measurement mode at interval of 15 minutes,
ECG/TEMP module connected, sidestream CO2
connected, recording at interval of 10 minutes,
brightness set to “1”)
Charge Time ≤350 min (Monitor is on or in standby mode.)
Alarm Low battery alarm is provided.

A.6 Display
Display screen: 17 inch color TFT screen, touch screen is configurable
Resolution: 1280 × 1024
A maximum of 15 waveforms can be displayed on the same screen.

A.7 Indicators
One AC Power LED Green
One Charge LED Yellow/green
One Physiological Alarm LED Red/yellow/blue
One Technical Alarm LED Red/yellow/blue
One Alarm Mute LED Red

- 201 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.8 Recorder
Record Width 48 mm
Paper Speed 12.5mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Channels 3
Recording Types Continuous real-time recording
8-second real-time recording
Automatic interval recording
Physiological alarm recording
Trend graph review recording
Trend table review recording
NIBP review recording
Arrhythmia review recording
Alarm review recording
Titration table recording
Hemodynamic calculation recording
C.O. measurement recording
12-lead diagnosis review recording
Frozen waveform recording

A.9 Data Storage


Trend 1 hr, at 1 second resolution
150 hrs, at 1 min. resolution
NIBP Measurement Review 1200 sets
Alarm Review 200 sets
Arrhythmia Review 200 sets
12-Lead Diagnosis Review 50 sets

- 202 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.10 ECG
Lead Mode 3-Lead: I, II, III
5-Lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
12-Lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6

Lead Naming Style AHA, IEC

Display Sensitivity 1.25mm/mV (×0.125), 2.5mm/mV (×0.25), 5mm/mV (×0.5),


10mm/mV (×1), 20mm/mV (×2), 40mm/mV (×4), AUTO gain

Sweep 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s

Bandwidth (-3dB) Diagnosis: 0.05Hz to 150Hz


Monitor: 0.5Hz to 40Hz
Surgery: 1Hz to 20Hz

CMRR (Common Mode Diagnosis: >95dB (the Notch filter is off)


Rejection Ratio) Monitor: >105dB (the Notch filter is on)
Surgery: >105dB (the Notch filter is on)

Notch In diagnosis, monitor and surgery modes: 50Hz/60Hz (Notch


filter can be turned on or off manually)

Differential Input >5MΩ


Impedance

Input Signal Range ±10mV PP

Accuracy of Input Signal The total error and frequency response comply with
Reproduction ANSI/AAMI EC13: 2002, Sect. 4.2.9.8.

Electrode Offset Potential ±500mV


Tolerance

Auxiliary Current (Leads Active electrode: <100nA


off detection) Reference electrode: <900nA

Recovery Time After <5s


Defibrillation

Leakage Current of Patient <10μA

Scale Signal 1mV PP, accuracy is ±5%

- 203 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

System Noise <30μVPP (RTI)

Sampling Frequency 1000Hz

Sampling Channel Switch <80μS


Time

A/D Precision 24 Bits

ESU Protection Restore time: ≤10s

Minimum Input Slew Rate >2.5V/s


(Lead II)

Pace Pulse

Pulse Indicator Pulse is marked if the requirements of ANSI/AAMI


EC13:2002, Sect. 4.1.4.1 are met:
Amplitude: ±2 mV to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 ms to2.0 ms
Ascending time: 10 μs to 100 μs

Pulse Rejection Pulse is rejected if the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13:


2002, Sect. 4.1.4.1 are met:
Amplitude: ±2 mV to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 ms to 2.0 ms
Ascending time: 10 μs to 100 μs

Pace Pulse Detecting Lead: one among I, II, III, AVR, AVL, AVF, V1, V2, V3,V4, V5, V6

Heart Rate

HR Calculation

Range ADU: 15 bpm to 300 bpm


PED/NEO: 15 bpm to 350 bpm

Accuracy ±1% or 1 bpm, whichever is greater

Resolution 1 bpm

PVC

- 204 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Range ADU: 0 to 300 PVCs/ min


PED/NEO: 0 to 350 PVCs/ min

Resolution 1 PVCs/min

ST value

Range -2.0 mV to +2.0 mV

Accuracy -0.8 mV to +0.8 mV: ±0.02 mV or 10%, whichever is greater.


Beyond this range: not specified.

Resolution 0.01 mV

HR Averaging Method

Method 1 Heart rate is computed by excluding the minimum and


maximum values from the 12 most recent RR intervals and
averaging the residual 10 RR intervals.

Method 2 If each of three consecutive RR intervals is greater than 1200ms,


then the four most recent RR intervals are averaged to compute
the HR.

Range of Sinus and SV Rhythm

Tachy ADU: 120 bpm to 300 bpm


PED/NEO: 160 bpm to 350 bpm

Normal ADU: 41 bpm to 119 bpm


PED/NEO: 61 bpm to159 bpm

Brady ADU: 15 bpm to 40 bpm


PED/NEO: 15 bpm to 60 bpm

- 205 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Range of Ventricular Rhythm

Ventricular Tachycardia The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats is less than 600
ms

Ventricular Rhythm The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats ranges from 600
ms to 1000 ms

Ventricular Bradycardia The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats is more than 1000
ms

Maximum Start-up Alarm Time for Tachycardia

Ventricular Tachycardia Gain 0.5: 10 s


1 mV 206bpm Gain 1.0: 10 s
Gain 2.0: 10 s

Ventricular Tachycardia Gain 0.5: 10 s


2 mV 195bpm Gain 1.0: 10 s
Gain 2.0: 10 s

Response Time of Heart HR range: 80 bpm to 120 bpm


Rate Meter to Change in Range : 7s to 8s, average is 7.5s
HR
HR range: 80bpm to 40bpm
Range : 7s to 8s, average is 7.5s

Tall T-wave Rejection Complied with ANSI/AAMI EC13: 2002 Sect. 4.1.2.1 c)
minimum recommended 1.2mV T-Wave amplitude

Accuracy of Heart Rate Complied with ANSI/AAMI EC13: 2002 Sect.4.1.2.1 e), the HR
Meter and Response to value after 20 seconds of stabilization is displayed as follows:
Irregular Rhythm Ventricular bigeminy: 80bpm±1bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy: 60bpm±1bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy: 120bpm±1bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 91bpm±1bpm

- 206 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Arrhythmia analyses ASYSTOLE VFIB/VTAC COUPLET


VT>2 BIGEMINY TRIGEMINY
VENT R on T PVC
TACHY BRADY MISSED BEATS
IRR VBRADY PNC

PNP

Average parameters of heart beat

Heart rate (bpm)

Time limit of P wave (ms)


12-Lead ECG
PR interval (ms)
Synchronization Analysis
QRS interval (ms)

QT/QTC (ms)

P-QRS-T AXIS

A.11 RESP
Method Impedance between RA-LL, RA-LA

Measurement lead Options are lead I and II. The default is lead II.

Calculation Type Manual, Automatic

Baseline Impedance Range 200Ω to 2500Ω(with ECG cables of 1KΩ resistance)

Measuring Sensitivity Within the baseline impedance range: 0.3Ω

Waveform Bandwidth 0.2Hz to 2.5Hz (-3dB)

Respiration Excitation Sinusoid, 62.8kHz(  10%), <500μA


Waveform

RR Measuring Range

Adult 0 rpm to120rpm

Neo/Ped 0 rpm to150rpm

Resolution 1 rpm

Accuracy

- 207 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Adult 6 to 120 rpm: 2 rpm


0 to 5 rpm: not specified

Neo/Ped 6 to 150 rpm: 2 rpm


0 to 5 rpm: not specified

Gain Selection 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5


Sweep 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s
Apnea Alarm Time Setup 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.

A.12 NIBP
The manufacturer’s Module
Technique Oscillometry
Mode Manual, Auto, Continuous
Measuring Interval in AUTO 1/2/3/4/5/10/15/30/60/90/120/240/480 min
Mode
Continuous 5min, interval is 5s
Measuring Type SYS, DIA, MAP, PR
Measuring Range
Adult Mode SYS: 40 mmHg to 270 mmHg
DIA: 10 mmHg to 215 mmHg
MAP: 20 mmHg to 235 mmHg
Pediatric Mode SYS: 40 mmHg to 200 mmHg
DIA: 10 mmHg to 150 mmHg
MAP: 20 mmHg to 165 mmHg
Neonatal Mode SYS: 40 mmHg to 135 mmHg
DIA: 10 mmHg to 100 mmHg
MAP: 20 mmHg to 110 mmHg
Alarm Type SYS, DIA, MAP
Cuff Pressure Measuring Range 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg
Pressure Resolution 1mmHg
Maximum Mean Error ±5mmHg
Maximum Standard Deviation 8mmHg

- 208 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Maximum Measuring Period


Adult/Pediatric 120s
Neonate 90s
Typical Measuring Period 30s to 45s (depend on HR/motion disturbance)
Overpressure Protection
Adult 297±3mmHg
Pediatric 240±3mmHg
Neonatal 147±3mmHg
PR
Measuring Range 40 bpm to 240bpm
Accuracy ±3bpm or 3.5%, whichever is greater

Omron Module
Method Oscillometric
Mode Manual, Auto, Continuous
Measuring Interval in AUTO Mode 1/2/3/4/5/10/15/30/60/90 min, 2/4/8h
PR Range Adult/ Pediatric mode: 40bpm to 200bpm
Neonatal mode: 40 bpm to 240bpm
PR Accuracy  2 bpm or 2% of the readings
Measuring Type SYS, DIA, MAP
Measuring Range
Adult/ Pediatric Mode SYS: 60 mmHg to 250 mmHg
DIA: 40 mmHg to 200 mmHg
MAP: 45 mmHg to 235 mmHg
Neonatal Mode SYS: 40 mmHg to 120 mmHg
DIA: 20 mmHg to 90 mmHg
MAP: 30 mmHg to 100 mmHg
Alarm Type SYS, DIA, MAP
Cuff pressure Measuring Range 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg
Pressure Resolution 1mmHg

- 209 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Measuring Accuracy
Maximum Mean Error ±5mmHg
Maximum Standard 8mmHg
Deviation
Adult/Pediatric Neonate

Normal Single Fault Normal Single fault


Condition Condition Condition Condition
Maximum Cuff 300 mmHg 330 mmHg 150 mmHg 165 mmHg
Pressure
Maximum Measuring Less than 160s Less than 180s Less than 80s Less than 90s
Period

A.13 SpO2
The manufacturer’s Module
Measuring Range 0 to 100 %
Resolution 1%
Data Update Period 1s
Accuracy
Adult /Pediatric 2 % (70% to 100% SpO2)
Undefined (0 to 69% SpO2)
Neonate 3 % (70% to 100% SpO2)
Undefined (0 to 69% SpO2)
Pulse Rate
Measuring Range 25 bpm to 300 bpm
Alarm Range 30 bpm to 300 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy 2bpm
Sensor
Red Light 6603 nm
Infrared Light 9055 nm
Emitted Light Energy < 15 mW

- 210 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Nellcor Module
Measuring Range 1% to 100%
Resolution 1%
Data Update Period 1s
Sensor Type Accuracy
Accuracy
DS-100A, OXI-A/N  3%(70% to 100% SpO2)
* When the sensor is used on neonates as recommended, the specified accuracy range
increases by ±1 compared with that used on adults.
Pulse Rate
Measuring Range 20bpm to 300bpm
Resolution 1bpm
Accuracy  3bpm (20bpm to 250bpm)
Sensor Wave length: approximately 660 and 900nm
Emitted light energy: <15mW

A.14 TEMP
Technique Thermal resistance
Position Skin, oral cavity, rectum
Measure Parameter T1, T2, TD(the absolute value of T2 minus T1)
Channel 2
Sensor Type YSI-10K and YSI-2.252K
Unit C, F
Measuring Range 0 C to 50 C(32 ºF to 122 ºF)
Resolution 0.1C (0.1 ºF)
Accuracy (not including sensor) 0.1C (0.2 ºF)
Refresh Time Every 1s to 2s
Self-test At an interval less than 1 minute

- 211 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.15 IBP
Technique Direct invasive measurement
Channel 8
IBP Measuring Art 0 to +300 mmHg
Measure Range
PA -6 to +120mmHg
CVP/RAP/LAP/ICP -10 to +40 mmHg
P1/P2 -50 to +300 mmHg
Resolution 1 mmHg
Accuracy (not including sensor)  2 % or 1 mmHg, whichever is
greater
ICP:
0mmHg to 40mmHg:  2 % or 1
mmHg, whichever is greater;
-10mmHg to 0mmHg: undefined
PR Measure Measuring Range 20bpm to 300bpm
Resolution 1bpm
Accuracy 30bpm to 300bpm:  2bpm or 
2%,whichever is greater;
20bpm to 29bpm: undefined
Pressure Unit kPa, mmHg, cmH2O
Pressure sensor
Sensitivity 5μV/V/mmHg
Impedance Range 300Ω to 3000Ω
Filter DC~ 12.5Hz; DC~ 40Hz
Zero Calibration Range: 200 mmHg
Pressure Calibration IBP (excluding ICP) 80mmHg to 300mmHg
Range
ICP 10mmHg to 40mmHg
Volume Displacement 4.5 x 10-4 in3 / 100 mmHg

- 212 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.16 CO2
The manufacturer’s Module
Intended
Adult, pediatric, neonatal
Patient
Measure
EtCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Parameters
Unit mmHg, %, kPa

Measuring CO2 0 mmHg to 150 mmHg (0 % to 20%)


Range AwRR 2 rpm to 150 rpm
EtCO2 1mmHg
Resolution FiCO2 1mmHg
AwRR 1rpm
 2mmHg,
0mmHg to
40mmHg
 5% of reading,
41mmHg to
70mmHg Respiratory Typical conditions:
 8% of reading, rate ≤60rpm Ambient temperature: 25
71mmHg to 3℃
100mmHg Barometric pressure: 760
EtCO2
Accuracy  10% of 10mmHg
reading, Balance gas: N2
101mmHg to Sample gas flowrate:
150mmHg 100ml/min
12% or 
4mmHg of
Respiratory
reading,
rate >60rpm
whichever is
greater
AwRR  1 rpm
Drift of
Measure Meets the requirements of the measure accuracy
Accuracy
Sample Gas
70ml/min or 100ml/min, optional (15ml/min)
Flowrate
Warm-upTime Display reading within 20s; reach to the designed accuracy within 2 minutes.
400ms (water trap with 2m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate:
Rise Time
100ml/min)

- 213 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Response
<4s (water trap with 2m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate: 100ml/min)
Time
Work Mode Standby, measure
Range: 0% to 100%
O2
Resolution: 1%
Compensation
Default: 16%
Range: 0% to 100%
N2O
Resolution: 1%
Compensation
Default: 0%
Range: 0% to 20%
AG
Resolution: 0.1%
Compensation
Default: 0%
Humidity
Compensation ATPD(default), BTPS
Method
Barometric
Automatic (The change of barometric pressure will not add additional errors
Pressure
to the measurement values.)
Compensation
Zero
Support
Calibration
Calibration Support
Alarm EtCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Apnea Alarm 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.
Delay

Interfering Gas Effects:

Gas Gas Level (%) Quantitative Effect/Comments

Nitrous oxide 60 The interfering gas will have no effect on the


Halothane 4 measurement value if compensation of O2, N2O,
anesthetic agents has been correctly set.
Enflurane 5
Isoflurane 5
Sevoflurane 5
Desflurane 15

Respironics Module

Applicable Patient Type Adult, pediatric and neonatal patients


Technique Infra-red Absorption Technique

Measure Parameters EtCO2, FiCO2, AwRR

- 214 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Unit mmHg, %, Kpa


Measuring Range
EtCO2 0 mmHg to 150 mmHg
FiCO2 3 mmHg to 50 mmHg
AwRR 0 rpm to 150 rpm (Mainstream)
2 rpm to 150 rpm (Sidestream)
Resolution EtCO2 1mmHg
FiCO2 1mmHg
AwRR 1 rpm
EtCO2 Accuracy  2 mmHg, 0 to 40 mmHg
 5 % of reading, 41 to 70 mmHg
 8 % of reading, 71 to 100 mmHg
 10 % of reading, 101 to 150 mmHg
 12% of reading, RR is over 80 rpm (sidestream)
AwRR Accuracy  1 rpm
Operation Mode Measure, standby
Sample Gas Flowrate 50 ±10 ml/min
(sidestream)
O2 Compensation
Range 0 to 100%
Resolution 1%
Default 16%

Barometric Pressure User setup


Compensation
Anesthetic Gas Compensation

Range 0 to 20%

Resolution 0.1%

Default 0.0%

Balance Gas Compensation Room air, N2O, helium


Stability
Short Term Drift Drift over 4 hours < 0.8 mmHg

- 215 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Long Term Drift 120 hours


Zero Calibration Support
Alarm Type EtCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Apnea Alarm Delay 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.

Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects on EtCO2 Measurement Values:

Gas or Vapor Gas Level (%) Quantitative Effect/Comments

Nitrous oxide 60 Dry and Saturated Gas


Halothane 4 0 – 40 mmHg: ± 1 mmHg additional error
Enflurane 5 41 – 70 mmHg: ± 2.5% additional error
Isoflurane 5 71 – 100 mmHg: ± 4% additional error
Sevoflurane 5 101 – 150 mmHg: ± 5% additional error
Xenon 80 *Additional worst case error when compensation
Helium 50 for PB, O2, N2O, anesthetic agents, or helium is
correctly selected for the actual fractional gas
Desflurane 15 constituents present.
Desflurane:
The presence of desflurane in the exhaled breath at
concentrations greater than 5% will positively bias
Carbon Dioxide values by up to an additional 3
mmHg at 38mmHg.
Xenon:
The presence of Xenon in the exhaled breath will
negatively bias Carbon Dioxide values by up to an
additional 5 mmHg at 38mmHg.

Barometric Pressure on EtCO2 Measurement Values:


Quantitative Effect
Ambient Barometric, Operational
0 – 40 mmHg: ± 1 mmHg additional error
41 – 70 mmHg: ± 2.5% additional error
71 – 100 mmHg: ± 4% additional error
101 – 150 mmHg: ± 5% additional error
*Additional worst case error when compensation for PB, O2, N2O, anesthetic agents, or helium
is correctly selected for the actual fractional gas constituents present.

- 216 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.17 C.O.
Technique Thermodilution Technique
Measure Parameters C.O., TB, TI
Measuring Range
C.O. 0.1 L/min to 20L/min
TB 23C to 43C(73.4 º F to 109.4 º F)
TI -1C to 27C(30.2 º F to 80.6 º F)
Resolution
C.O. 0.1L/min
TB, TI 0.1C (+0.1 º F)
Accuracy
C.O. 5% or  0.2 L/min, whichever is greater
TB 0.1C (not including sensor)
TI 0.1C (not including sensor)

NOTE:
At least 90% of the C.O. data should reside inside the bounded region, and the lower
95% confidence interval should not exceed 85%.

A.18 AG
A.18.1 Sidestream
Module Type ISA AX+ Displaying the concentration of
CO2, N2O, and two anaesthesia
agent and identifying the
anaesthesia agent automatically
(built-in module)
ISA OR+ Displaying the concentration of
CO2, O2, N2O, and two
anaesthesia agent and
identifying the anaesthesia
agent automatically (built-in
module)
Measurement CO2 , N2O , O2, Halothane (HAL), Isoflurane(ISO), Enflurane(ENF),
Parameters Sevoflurane(SEV) , Desflurane(DES), awRR, MAC

- 217 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Measurement CO2, N2O, Anaesthesia Agent: infra-red absorption characteristic;


Principle O2: Paramagnetic method
Sampling Flow Rate 5010ml/min
Work Mode Measure
Warm-up Time < 20s
Typical Rise Time CO2 ≤ 200ms
HAL, ISO, ENF, SEV, DES ≤ 350ms
N2O ≤ 350ms
O2 ≤ 450ms
Primary Anaesthesia ≤ 0.15 vol%
Agent Threshold
Second Anaesthesia 0.2 vol% + 10%
Agent Threshold
Agent Identification < 20 seconds (typically < 10 seconds)
Time
Response Time < 3 seconds
Data Update Period 1s
Measurement Range CO2: 0 to 25 vol%
O2: 0 to 100 vol%
N2O: 0 to 100 vol%
HAL, ENF, ISO, SEV, DES: 0-25 vol%
AwRR: 0 to 150rpm
Resolution CO2: 0.1%
HAL, ENF, ISO, SEV, DES: 0.1%
N2O: 1%
O2:1%
AwRR: 1rpm
Accuracy- Gas Range Accuracy
Standard
CO2 0 to 15 vol% ±(0.2 vol% + 2% of reading)
Conditions
15 to 25 vol% Unspecified
N2O 0 to 100 vol% ±(2 vol% + 2% of reading)
HAL, ENF, ISO 0 to 8 vol % ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
8 to 25 vol % Unspecified

- 218 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

SEV 0 to 10 vol % ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)


10 to 25 vol % Unspecified
DES 0 to 22 vol % ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
22 to 25 vol % Unspecified
O2 0 to 100 vol % ±(1 vol% + 2% of reading)
Accuracy- Gas Accuracy
All
CO2 ±(0.3kPa + 4% of reading)
Conditions
N2O ±(2kPa + 5% of reading)
Agents ±(0.2kPa + 10% of reading)
O2 ±(2kPa + 2 of reading)
AwRR Accuracy ±1rpm
Apnea Alarm Delay 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.

Alarm Providing alarms of EtCO2 , FiCO2 , EtO2 , FiO2 , EtN2O , FiN2O ,


EtAA , FiAA , AwRR
Exhaust Emission Interface for exhaust collection is available
Support:
 Zero calibration
 O2 compensation
 N2O compensation

Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects:


Gas or Vapour Gas Level CO2 Agents N2O
ISA AX+
ISA OR+
N2O4) 60 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

HAL4) 4 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

ENF, ISO, SEV4) 5 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

DES4) 15 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

Xe(Xenon)4) 80 vol% -10% of reading 3) _ 1) _ 1)

He(Helium) 4) 50 vol% -6% of reading 3) _ 1) _ 1)

Metered Dose Inhaler Not for use with metered dose inhaler propellants
Propellants4)

- 219 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

C2H5OH(Ethanol) 4) 0.3 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

_ 1) _ 1) _ 1)
C3H7OH 0.5 vol%
(Isopropanol) 4)
CH3COCH3 (Acetone) 4) 1 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

CH4(Methane) 4) 3 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

CO(Carbon monoxide) 5) 1 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

_ 1) _ 1) _ 1)
NO(Nitrogen monoxide) 0.02 vol%
O25) 100 vol% _ 2) _ 1) _ 1)

Note 1: Negligible interference, effect included in the specification “Accuracy, all conditions”
above.
Note 2: Negligible interference with N2O / O2 concentrations correctly set, effect included in the
specification “Accuracy, all conditions” above.
Note 3: Interference at indicated gas level. For example, 50 vol% Helium typically decreases the
CO2 readings by 6%. This means that if measuring on a mixture containing 5.0vol% CO2 and
50vol% Helium, the actual measured CO2 concentration will typically be (1-0.06) * 5.0vol% =
4.7vol% CO2.
Note 4: According to the EN ISO 21647:2004 standard.
Note 5: In addition to the EN ISO 21647:2004 standard.

A.18.2 Mainstream
Module Type IRMA AX+ Displaying the concentration of CO2, N2O and two
anaesthesia agent and indentifying two anaesthesia
agent
Measurement CO2, N2O, HAL, Isoflurane(ISO), Enflurane(ENF),
Parameters Sevoflurane(SEV), Desflurane(DES), awRR, MAC

Measurement CO2, N2O, anaesthesia agent: infra-red absorption characteristic


Principle
Warm-up Time Concentrations are reported and the automatic agent indentification
is running within 10 seconds.
Full accuracy within 20 seconds
Rise Time CO2 ≤ 90ms
N2O ≤ 300ms
HAL, ISO, ENF, SEV, DES ≤ 300ms

- 220 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Primary Agent 0.15 vol%


Threshold
Secondary Agent 0.2 vol% + 10% of total agent concentration
Threshold
Agent Identification < 20 seconds (typically < 10 seconds)
Time
Response Time < 1 second
Data Update Period 1s
Measurement Range CO2: 0 to 25 vol%
N2O: 0 to 100 vol%
HAL, ENF, ISO, SEV, DES: 0-25 vol%
AwRR: 0 to 150rpm
Resolution CO2: 0.1%
HAL, ENF, ISO, SEV, DES: 0.1%
N2O: 1%
AwRR: 1rpm
Accuracy- Standard Gas Range Accuracy
Conditions
CO2 0 to 10 vol% ±(0.2 vol% + 2% of reading)
10 to 15vol% ±(0.3 vol% + 2% of reading)
15 to 25 vol% Unspecified
N2O 0 to 100 vol% ±(2 vol% + 2% of reading)
HAL 0 to 8 vol% ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
ISO 8 to 25 vol% Unspecified
ENF
SEV 0 to 10 vol% ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
10 to 25 vol% Unspecified
DES 0 to 22 vol% ±(0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
22 to 25 vol% Unspecified
Accuracy- All Gas Accuracy
Conditions
CO2 ±(0.3vol% + 4% of reading)
N2O ±(2vol%+ 5% of reading)
Agents ±(0.2vol% + 10% of reading)
AwRR Accuracy ±1rpm

- 221 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Apnea Alarm Delay 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.
Work Mode Measure
Alarm Providing alarms of EtCO2 , FiCO2, EtN2O , FiN2O , EtAA, FiAA,
AwRR
Support:
 Real-time gas concentration monitoring
 Zero calibration

Interfering Gas and Vapour Effects:


Gas or Vapour Gas Level CO2 Agents N2O
IRMA AX+
N2O4) 60 vol% _ 1&2) _ 1) _ 1)

HAL4) 4 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

ENF, ISO, SEV4) 5 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

DES4) 15 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

Xe(Xenon)4) 80 vol% -10% of reading _ 1) _ 1)


3)

He(Helium) 4) 50 vol% -6% of reading _ 1) _ 1)


3)

Metered Dose Inhaler Not for use with metered dose inhaler propellants
Propellants4)
C2H5OH(Ethanol) 4) 0.3 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

_ 1) _ 1) _ 1)
C3H7OH 0.5 vol%
(Isopropanol) 4)
_ 1) _ 1) _ 1)
CH3COCH3 (Acetone) 1 vol%
4)

CH4(Methane) 4) 3 vol% _ 1) _ 1) _ 1)

_ 1) _ 1) _ 1)
CO(Carbon monoxide) 1 vol%
5)

O25) 100 vol% _ 1&2) _ 1) _ 1)

Note 1: Negligible interference, effect included in the specification “Accuracy, all conditions”
above.
Note 2: IRMA AX+ does not measure O2.
Note 3: Interference at indicated gas level. For example, 50 vol% Helium typically decreases the
CO2 readings by 6%. This means that if measuring on a mixture containing 5.0vol% CO2 and

- 222 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

50vol% Helium, the measured CO2 concentration will typically be (1-0.06) * 5.0 vol% = 4.7vol%
CO2.
Note 4: According to the EN ISO 21647:2004 standard.
Note 5: In addition to the EN ISO 21647:2004 standard.

A.19 BIS
Technique Bispectral index, power spectrum analysis
Measure Primary Parameter BIS 0 to 100
Parameters Secondary Parameters SQI 0% to 100%
SR 0% to 100%
EMG 30dB to 80dB
SEF 0.5Hz to 30.0Hz
TP 40dB to 100dB
BC (only applicable to 0 to 30
BIS™ Extend Sensor)
Sweep Speed 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s
Wave Scale 50μv, 100μv, 200μv, 500μv
BIS Trend Length of BIS trend: 6min, 12min, 30min, 60min
Smoothing Rate 10s, 15s, 30s
Noise (EEG <0.3μV (0.25Hz~50Hz)
Waveform)
EEG Bandwidth 0.25Hz~50Hz
BIS Alarm 0~100
Range

A.20 RM
Measure Parameters Flow, Tidal Volume, Airway Pressure, Respiration Rate
Sensor Zero Typically 2 seconds. Maximum zero interval is 10 minutes for an adult and
pediatric sensor, and 3 minutes for a neonatal sensor.
Frequency Response >10Hz
Purging Automatic. Occurs during exhalation.
Adult and Pediatric: 2.5 second duration per line at 10 minute intervals
Neonatal: 1.5 second duration at 3 minute intervals

- 223 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Flow
Range Adult 2.0 L/min to 180 L/min
Pediatric 0.75 L/min to 100 L/min
Neonatal 0.25 L/min to 30 L/min
Accuracy Adult 0.5 L/min or ± 3% of reading,
whichever is greater
Pediatric 0.25 L/min or ± 3% of reading,
whichever is greater
Neonatal 0.125 L/min or ± 3% of reading,
whichever is greater
Resolution 0.01 L/min
Tidal Volume
Range Adult 40 mL to 2500 mL
Pediatric 6 mL to 750 mL
Neonatal 2 mL to 100 mL
Accuracy Adult ± 10.0 mL or ± 5% of reading,
whichever is greater
Pediatric ± 3.0 mL or ± 5% of reading,
whichever is greater
Neonatal ± 1.0 mL or ± 5% of reading,
whichever is greater
Resolution Adult/Pediatric 1.0 mL
Neonatal 0.1 mL
Airway Pressure
Range Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal -120 cmH2O to 120 cmH2O
Accuracy Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal 0.5 cmH2O or ± 2% of reading,
whichever is greater
Resolution Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal 0.1 cmH2O
AwRR
Range Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal 2 rpm to 150 rpm
Accuracy Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal ± 1 rpm
Subparameters
Parameters Range Accuracy

Peak Inspiratory 1 cmH2O to 120.0 cmH2O 0.1 cmH2O


Pressure (PIP)

- 224 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Plateau Pressure Adult/Pediatric: 1.0 cmH2O 0.1 cmH2O


(Pplat) to 99 cmH2O

Positive 1.0 cmH2O to 50.0 cmH2O 0.1 cmH2O


End-Expiratory
Pressure (PEEP)
Mean Airway 0.0 cmH2O to 100.0 cmH2O 0.1 cmH2O
Pressure (Pmean)

Peak Inspiratory Adult: 2.0 L/min to 180.0 Adult/Pediatric: 1 L/min


Flow (PIF) L/min Neonatal: 0.1 L/min
Pediatric: 0.75 L/min to
100.0 L/Min
Neonatal: 0.25 L/min to
30.00 L/Min

Peak Expiratory Adult: 2.0 L/min to 180.0 Adult/Pediatric: 1 L/min


Flow (PEF) L/min Neonatal: 0.1 L/min
Pediatric: 0.75 L/min to
100.0 L/min
Neonatal: 0.25 L/min to
30.00 L/min
Inspired Minute Adult: 1 L/min to 30.00 Adult: 0.1 L/min
Volume (MVi) L/min Pediatric: 0.1 L/min
Pediatric: 0.3 L/min to 20 Neonatal: 0.1 L/min
L/min
Neonatal: 0.1 L/min to 3
L/min
Expired Minute Adult: 1 L/min to 30.00 Adult: 0.1 L/min
Volume (MVe) L/min Pediatric: 0.1 L/min
Pediatric: 0.3 L/min to 20 Neonatal: 0.1 L/min
L/min
Neonatal: 0.1 L/min to 3
L/min
Inspired Tidal Adult: 40 mL to 2500 mL Adult: 1 mL
Volume (TVi) Pediatric: 6 mL to 750 mL Pediatric: 1 mL

Neonatal: 2 mL to 100.0 mL Neonatal: 0.1 mL

Expired Tidal Adult: 40 mL to 2500 mL Adult: 1 mL


Volume (TVe) Pediatric: 6 mL to 750 mL Pediatric: 1 mL

Neonatal: 2 mL to 100.0 mL Neonatal: 0.1 mL

- 225 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Inspiration to 4.0:1 to 1:4.0 0.1


Expiration ratio
(I:E)
Rapid Shallow 0 - 250 (br/min)/L 1 (br/min)/L
Breathing Index
(RSBI)

Negative Inspiratory -120.0 cmH2O to 0 cmH2O 0.1 cmH2O


Pressure (NIP) * Relative to PEEP

Airway Adult: 0.1 cmH2O/L/sec


Resistance-Inspired 5.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 50.0
(RAWi)
cmH2O/L/sec
Pediatric:
20.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 100.0
cmH2O/L/sec
Neonatal:
50.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 200.0
cmH2O/L/sec

Airway Adult: 0.1 cmH2O/L/sec


Resistance-Expired 5.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 50.0
(RAWe)
cmH2O/L/sec
Pediatric:
20.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 100.0
cmH2O/L/sec
Neonatal:
50.0 cmH2O/L/sec to 200.0
cmH2O/L/sec

Dynamic Adult: 0.1 mL/cmH2O


Compliance (Cdyn) 10.0 mL/cmH2O to
100.0mL/cmH2O
Pediatric:
5.0 mL/cmH2O to 50
mL/cmH2O
Neonatal: 1.0 mL/cmH2O to
15 mL/cmH2O

- 226 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Airway Pressure Adult/Pediatric: 0.1 cmH2O


100 msec after the
0 cmH2O to 10.0 cmH2O
Start of Inspiration
(P0.1)
EtCO2 (CO2 sensor 5.0 mmHg to 150.0 mmHg 1 mmHg
is required) (0.7 kPa to 20.0 kPa/ 0.7% to
19.7 %)

FiCO2 (CO2 sensor 3.0 mmHg to 50.0 mmHg 1 mmHg


is required) (0.4 kPa to 6.6 kPa/ 0.4% to
6.6 %)

Alarm Type AwRR, PIP, PEEP, MVe


Apnea alarm delay 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s; default value is 20s.

A.21 ICG
Technique Thoracic electrical bioimpedance
Measuring SV: 0 ml/beat~250 ml/beat
Range
HR: 40 bpm~250bpm
C.O.: 0 L/min~30 L/min
Accuracy SV: Undefined
HR: ±2bpm
C.O.: Undefined

A.22 Interfaces
A.22.1 Analog Output
Bandwidth (-3dB; reference Diagnosis: 0.05Hz to 100Hz
frequency: 10Hz) Monitor: 0.5Hz to 40Hz
Surgery: 1Hz to 20Hz

Maximum Transmission Delay 500ms


(Diagnosis Mode)

Sensitivity 1V/1mV ±10%

PACE Rejection/ Enhancement Not applicable.

Waveform Display Consistent with the calculation leads.

- 227 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

Compliant with Standard and Complies with the requirements in terms of short circuit
Directive protection and leakage current in EN60601-1.

Output Impedance <500Ω

Interface Type PJ-365 socket, 3.5mm audio plug

A.22.2 Defibrillator Synchronization


Output Impedance <500Ω

Maximum Time Delay 35mS (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)

Waveform Rectangular wave

Amplitude High level: 3.5V to 5V, providing a maximum of 1mA


output current;
Low level: <0.5V, receiving a maximum of 5mA input
current

Minimum Required R-wave 0.3mV


Amplitude

Pulse Width 100mS±10%

Limited Current 15mA rating

Rising and Falling Time <1mS

Interface Type BNC-SR-2P connector

A.22.3 Nurse Call


Drive Mode Voltage output

Power Supply ≤12VDC, 200mA Max.

Contact Type Normally open or contact (optional)

Interface Type PJ-365 socket, 3.5mm audio plug

- 228 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.22.4 USB Interfaces


Number of USB Interfaces Standard: 4; optional: 4

Drive Mode HOST interface, USB1.0/2.0 protocol

Power Supply 5VDC±5%, 500mA Max.

Interface Type USB A-type port

A.22.5 VGA Interface


Number of VGA Interface 1

Horizontal Refreshing Rate 30-94KHZ

Video Signal 0.7 Vpp @ 75 Ohm, HSYNC/VSYNC signal TTL

Interface Type DB-15 female receptacle

A.22.6 DVI Interface*


*Auto drive is only applicable to DVI display. A HDMI-to-DVI tieline is required.

Clock Rate ≤158MHZ

DVI Video Signal 1280×1024@85HZ; 4:3;

Interface Type HDMI A-type port

A.22.7 RS232 Interface


Level RS232

Power Supply +/-13.2V, 60mA Max.

Interface Type DB-9 female receptacle

A.22.8 PAM Interface*


*Only use link cable supplied by the manufacturer.

Level RS422

Power Supply ≤24VDC, 2A Max.

Interface Type POWER USB port

- 229 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Product Specifications

A.22.9 Network Interface


Bandwidth 10M/100M

Interface Type Standard RJ-45 network interface

- 230 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual EMC Information

B EMC Information
- Guidance and Manufacture’s Declaration
B.1 Electromagnetic Emissions - for all EQUIPMENT and
SYSTEMS
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic emission
The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment – guidance
RF emissions The monitor uses RF energy only for its internal
CISPR 11 function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very
Group 1
low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emission The monitor is suitable for use in all
Class A establishments, other than domestic
CISPR 11
establishments and those directly connected to
Harmonic emissions the public low-voltage power supply network
Class A
IEC/EN 61000-3-2 that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions Complies
IEC/EN 61000-3-3

B.2 Electromagnetic Immunity - for all EQUIPMENT and


SYSTEMS
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC/EN 60601 test level Compliance level
environment - guidance
Electrostatic 6 kV contact 6 kV contact Floors should be wood,
discharge (ESD) concrete or ceramic tile.
8 kV air 8 kV air
IEC/EN 61000-4-2 If floor are covered with
synthetic material, the
relative humidity should
be at least 30%.

- 231 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual EMC Information

Electrical fast 2 kV for power supply 2kV for power Mains power quality
transient/burst lines supply lines should be that of a
IEC/EN 61000-4-4 typical commercial or
1 kV for input /output 1 kV for input
hospital environment.
signal /output signal
Surge 1 kV for line to line 1 kV for line to Mains power quality
IEC/EN 61000-4-5 line should be that of a
2 kV for line to ground
typical commercial or
2 kV for line to
hospital environment.
ground
Power frequency 3A/m 3A/m Power frequency
(50/60Hz) magnetic fields should be
at levels characteristic of
magnetic field a typical location in a
IEC/EN 61000-4-8 typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
voltage variations typical commercial or
on power supply for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle hospital environment. If
input lines the user of the Patient
IEC/EN Monitor requires
40% UT 40% UT
61000-4-11 continued operation
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) during power mains
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles interruptions, it is
recommended that the
Patient Monitor be
70% UT 70% UT powered from an
uninterruptible power
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT)
supply or a battery.
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles

<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 sec for 5 sec
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

- 232 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual EMC Information

B.3 Electromagnetic Immunity - for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS


that are not LIFE-SUPPORTING
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The Patient Monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of Patient Monitor should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Immunity IEC/EN 60601 test Compliance Electromagnetic environment -
test level level guidance
Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should
be used no closer to any part of the
Patient Monitor, including cables,
than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms (1 Vrms when 3 Vrms (1 Vrms  3 .5 
using the V-ICG when using d   P
IEC/EN  V1 
61000-4-6 module) the V-ICG
150 kHz to 80 MHz module)  3 .5 
d    P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
 E1 

7
d    P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m 3 V/m  E1 
Radiated RF
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz Where P is the maximum output
IEC/EN
power rating of the transmitter in
61000-4-3
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in
metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey,a should
be less than the compliance level in
each frequency range.b

- 233 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual EMC Information

Interference may occur in the


vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio
(cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio
broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess
the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site
survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
Patient Monitor is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the Patient
Monitor should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the
Patient Monitor.
b
Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than 3V/m.

B.4 Recommended Separation Distances


Recommended separation distances between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the monitor
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the monitor can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile
RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the monitor as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter(m)
output power of
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
transmitter
 3 .5   3 .5  7
(W) d   P d   P d   P
 V1   E1   E1 
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.7 3.7 7.3
100 12 12 23

- 234 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual EMC Information

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

- 235 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

C Default Settings
This appendix documents the most important default settings of your monitor as it is delivered
from the factory.
Note: If your monitor has been ordered preconfigured to your requirements, the settings at
delivery will be different from those listed here.

C.1 Patient Information Default Settings


Patient Information Settings
Patient Type Adult
Pace Off

C.2 Alarm Default Settings


Alarm Settings
Pause Time 120s
Mute On
Sensor Off Alarm On
Alarm Latch Unlatch

C.3 ECG Default Settings


ECG Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit 120 160 200
Alarm Low Limit 50 75 100
Pace Off
Lead Type 5 Leads
Display Normal
Filter Monitor
Smart Lead Off Off
Heart Volume 2
ST Analysis ADU PED NEO
ST Analysis Off

- 236 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Alarm Switch Off


Alarm Level Medium
Alarm Record Off
Alarm High Limit (ST-X) 0.2
Alarm Low Limit (ST-X) -0.2
X stands for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6.
ARR Analysis
ARR Analysis On
PVCs Alarm Level Medium
PVCs Alarm Switch Off
PVCs Alarm Record Off
ARR Alarm Settings Alarm Switch Alarm Level Alarm Record
ASYSTOLE On High Off
VFIB/VTAC On High Off
R ON T On Medium Off
VT > 2 On Medium Off
COUPLET On Medium Off
PVC On Medium Off
BIGEMINY On Medium Off
TRIGEMINY On Medium Off
TACHY On Medium Off
BRADY On Medium Off
MISSEDBEATS On Medium Off
IRR On Medium Off
PNC On Medium Off
PNP On Medium Off
VBRADY On Medium Off
VENT On Medium Off

C.4 RESP
RESP Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On

- 237 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Alarm Record Off


Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit 30 30 100
Alarm Low Limit 8 8 30
Apnea Time 20s
Calculation Type Auto
Resp Type II
Sweep 12.5mm/s
Amplitude 1

C.5 SpO2
SpO2 Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit 100 100 95
Alarm Low Limit 90 90 88
Pitch Tone On
Sensitivity Medium
SatSeconds (Nellcor Module) Off
Sweep 12.5mm/s

C.6 PR
PR Settings ADU PED NEO
PR Source SpO2
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit 120 160 200
Alarm Low Limit 50 75 100
Pulse Volume 3
Alarm Source Auto

- 238 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

C.7 NIBP
NIBP Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit (SYS) 160 120 90
Alarm Low Limit (SYS) 90 70 40
Alarm High Limit (Map) 110 90 70
Alarm Low Limit (Map) 60 50 30
Alarm High Limit (Dia) 90 70 60
Alarm Low Limit (Dia) 50 40 20
Inflation value the manufacturer’s 160 140 100
Module
Omron Module 180 180 120
Unit mmHg
Interval Manual

C.8 TEMP
TEMP Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit (T1) 39.0 39.0 39.0
Alarm Low Limit (T1) 36.0 36.0 36.0
Alarm High Limit (T2) 39.0 39.0 39.0
Alarm Low Limit (T2) 36.0 36.0 36.0
Alarm High Limit (TD) 2.0 2.0 2.0
Unit C

- 239 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

C.9 IBP
IBP Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Unit mmHg
Filter 12.5Hz
SYS, DIA, SYS, DIA, SYS, DIA,
MAP MAP MAP
Alarm High Limit (ART, P1, P2) 160, 90, 110 160, 90, 110 160, 90, 110
Alarm Low Limit (ART, P1, P2) 90, 50, 70 90, 50, 70 90, 50, 70
Alarm High Limit (PA) 35, 16, 20 35, 16, 20 35, 16, 20
Alarm Low Limit (PA) 10, 0, 0 10, 0, 0 10, 0, 0
MAP MAP MAP
Alarm High Limit (CVP, RAP, LAP, 10 10 10
ICP)
Alarm Low Limit (CVP, RAP, LAP, 0 0 0
ICP)

C.10 CO2
CO2 Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Work Mode Standby
Unit mmHg
Apnea Time 20s
O2 Compensate 16%
Anes Agent 0%
Alarm High Limit (EtCO2) 50 50 45
Alarm Low Limit (EtCO2) 15 20 30
Alarm High Limit (FiCO2) 4 4 4

- 240 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Alarm High Limit (AWRR) 30 30 100


Alarm Low Limit (AWRR) 8 8 30
Sweep 6.25mm/s
Amplitude Low

C.11 C.O.
C.O. Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit (TB) 43.0 43.0 43.0
Alarm Low Limit (TB) 23.0 23.0 23.0
Injective Temperature Auto
Source
Temperature Unit C
Interval 30
Constant 0.542

C.12 AG
AG Settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Work Mode Measure
Apnea Time 20s
Unit %
O2 Compensate OFF
Anes Agent HAL
Alarm High Limit (EtAA) 8.0 8.0 8.0
Alarm Low Limit (EtAA) 0.0 0.0 0.0
Alarm High Limit (FiAA) 6.0 6.0 6.0
Alarm Low Limit (FiAA) 0.0 0.0 0.0

- 241 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Alarm High Limit (EtN2O) 55 55 55


Alarm Low Limit (EtN2O) 0 0 0
Alarm High Limit (FiN2O) 53 53 53
Alarm Low Limit (FiN2O) 0 0 0
Alarm High Limit (EtO2) 90.0 90.0 90.0
Alarm Low Limit (EtO2) 18.0 18.0 18.0
Alarm High Limit (FiO2) 88.0 88.0 88.0
Alarm Low Limit (FiO2) 18.0 18.0 18.0
Sweep 12.5mm/s
Amplitude 2

C.13 BIS
BIS Settings ADU/PED

Alarm Switch On

Alarm Record Off

Alarm Level Medium

Unit /
BIS Alarm High
70
Limit
BIS Alarm Low
20
Limit

C.14 RM
RM Settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm Switch On

Alarm Level Medium

Alarm Record Off

Apnea Time 20s

TV/MV TV

Respiration Mode Self-breath

- 242 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Flow/Vol Flow

RR Alarm High Limit 30 30 60

RR Alarm Low Limit 8 8 30


PEEP Alarm High
25 25 25
Limit
PEEP Alarm Low Limit 1 1 1

PIP Alarm High Limit 40 25 20

PIP Alarm Low Limit 1 1 1

MVe Alarm High Limit 8 4 0.8

MVe Alarm Low Limit 4 2.5 0.4

Loop Type P-V

Reference Loop On
Top Ruler: 40 Top Ruler: 40 Top Ruler: 20
Paw Ruler
Bottom Ruler: -40 Bottom Ruler: -40 Bottom Ruler: -20
Top Ruler: 800 Top Ruler: 200 Top Ruler: 50
Vol Ruler
Bottom Ruler:-800 Bottom Ruler:-200 Bottom Ruler:-50
Top Ruler: 150 Top Ruler: 100 Top Ruler: 20
Flow Ruler
Bottom Ruler:-150 Bottom Ruler:-100 Bottom Ruler:-20
Sweep 12.5 mm/s

O2 Compensation 21%

Anesthetic Agent 0.0%

Balance Air Room Air

C.15 ICG
ICG Settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm Switch On

Alarm Level Medium

Alarm Record Off


CI Alarm High
5.0
Limit
CI Alarm Low Limit 1.5

- 243 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Default Settings

Sweep 12.5 mm/s

SYS /

DIA /

MAP /

CVP 6

PAWP 10

Hb 15

SpO2 /
Secondary
C.O., SVR, TFC
Parameter Selection

- 244 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Abbreviation

D Abbreviation
Abbr English Full Name/Description
AC Alternating current
Adu Adult
AG Anaesthesia gas
Art Arterial
aVF Left foot augmented lead
aVL Left arm augmented lead
aVR Right arm augmented lead
AwRR Airway respiration rate
BC Burst count
BIS Bispectral index
BP Blood pressure
BTPS Body temperature and pressure, saturated
CCU Cardiac care unit
CI Cardiac index
C.O. Cardiac output
CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CMS Central monitoring system
CO2 Carbon dioxide
COHb Carboxyhemoglobin
CVP Central venous pressure
DC Direct current
Des Desflurane
Dia Diastolic
ECG Electrocardiogram
EEC European Economic Community
EEG Electroencephalogram
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMG Electromyelogram
EMI Electromagnetic interference

- 245 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Abbreviation

Abbr English Full Name/Description


Enf Enflurane
ER Emergency room
ESU Electrosurgical unit
Et End-tidal
EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide
EtN2O End-tidal nitrous oxide
Eto Ethylene oxide
EtO2 End-tidal oxygen
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
Fi Fraction of inspired
FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide
FiN2O Fraction of inspired nitrous oxide
FiO2 Fraction of inspired oxygen
Hal Halothane
Hb Hemoglobin
Hb-CO Carbon mono-xide hemoglobin
HR Heart rate
IBP Invasive blood pressure
ICG Impedance cardiography
ICP Intracranial pressure
ICU Intensive care unit
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Iso Isoflurane
LA Left arm
LAP Left atrial pressure
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LL Left leg

- 246 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Abbreviation

Abbr English Full Name/Description


MAP Mean arterial pressure
MDD Medical Device Directive
MetHb Methemoglobin
MRI Magnetic resonance imaging
N/A Not applicable
N2 Nitrogen
N2O Nitrous oxide
Neo Neonate
NICU Neonatal intensive care unit
NIBP Non-invasive blood pressure
O2 Oxygen
OR Operating room
oxyCRG Oxygen cardio-respirogram
PA Pulmonary artery
PACU Post-anaesthesia care unit
PAWP Pulmonary artery wedge pressure
Ped Pediatric
Pleth Plethysmogram
PR Pulse rate
PVC Premature ventricular complex
R Right
RA Right arm
RAP Right atrial pressure
Resp Respiration
RHb Reduced hemoglobin
RL Right leg
RM Respiration mechanics
RR Respiration Rate
SEF Spectral edge frequency
Sev Sevoflurane
SpO2 Oxygen saturation of arterial blood

- 247 -
PM-2000M Patient Monitor User Manual Abbreviation

Abbr English Full Name/Description


SQI Signal quality indicator
SR Suppression ratio
SYS Systolic pressure
TB Blood Temperature
TD Temperature difference
TEMP Temperature
TP Total power
USB Universal serial bus

- 248 -

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy